Home

TP-Link TL-WR710N User Guide

1. Effective Time Anytime Y The time schedule can be setin Access Control gt Schedule Status Enabled Y Figure 4 55 Add or Modify Parental Control Entry For example If you desire that the child PC with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 AA can access www google com on Saturday only while the parent PC with MAC address 00 1 1 22 33 44 BB is without any restriction you should follow the settings below 1 Click Parental Control menu on the left to enter the Parental Control Settings page Check Enable and enter the MAC address 00 1 1 22 33 44 BB in the MAC Address of Parental PC field 75 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa 2 Click Access Restriction Schedule on the left to enter the Schedule Settings page Click Add New button to create a new schedule with Schedule Description is Schedule_1 Day is Sat and Time is all day 24 hours 3 Click Parental Control menu on the left to go back to the Add or Modify Parental Control Entry page e Click Add New button e Enter 00 11 22 33 44 AA in the MAC Address of Child PC field e Enter Allow Google in the Website Description field e Enter www google com in the Allowed Domain Name field e Select Schedule_1 you create just now from the Effective Time drop down list e In Status field select Enable 4 Click Save to complete the settings Then you will go back to the Parental
2. Figure 4 91 Diagnostic Results Note Only one user can use this tool at one time Ping Count Ping Packet Size and Ping Timeout are Ping Parameters Traceroute Max TTL is Traceroute Parameter 4 18 3 Firmware Upgrade The page allows you to upgrade the latest version firmware to keep your router up to date Firmware Upgrade File Browse Firmware Version 3 14 4 Build 130128 Rel 36510n Hardware Version WR710N v1 00000000 Figure 4 92 Firmware Upgrade New firmware is posted at www tp link com and can be downloaded for free If the router is not experiencing difficulties there is no need to upgrade firmware unless the new firmware supports a new feature you need 97 TL WR710N RENTES MIE TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa Note Ts de When you upgrade the router s firmware you will lose current configuration settings so make sure you backup the router s settings before you upgrade its firmware Make sure that your computer is connected to the Internet through the cable when you upgrade the firmware To upgrade through wireless connection is not allowed Set your IP address as static IP before upgrading To upgrade the router s firmware follow these instructions 1 Download the latest firmware upgrade file from our website http www tp link com 2 Enter or select the path name where you save the downloaded file on the computer into the File blank 3
3. Figure 4 82 IP amp MAC Binding Setting Add amp Modify To add IP amp MAC Binding entries 1 2 3 4 Click the Add New button Enter the MAC Address and IP Address Select the Bind checkbox Click the Save button to save it To modify or delete an existing entry 1 2 Find the desired entry in the table Click Modify or Delete as desired on the Modify column To find an existing entry 1 2 Click the Find button shown in Figure 4 81 Enter the MAC Address or IP Address Enter the Find button in the next page shown in Figure 4 83 Find IP amp MAC Binding Entry MAC Address IP Address ID MAC Address IP Address Bind Link 1 00 04 EB 00 07 BE 192 168 0 173 To page Figure 4 83 Find IP amp MAC Binding Entry 90 TL WR710N MENTE IET TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries 4 16 2 ARP List To manage the computer you could observe the computers in the LAN by checking the relationship of MAC address and IP address on the ARP list and you could configure the items on the ARP list also This page displays the ARP List it shows all the existing IP amp MAC Binding entries ARP List ID MAC Address IP Address Status Configure 1 6C 62 6D F7 31 8D 192 168 0 100 Unbound Load Delete 2 00 0A EB 00 07 BE 192 168 0 173 Bound
4. Figure 4 34 Storage Sharing gt Service Status Indicates the Network Sharing service s current status You can click the Start button to start the Storage Sharing service and click the Stop button to stop it 58 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa gt Volume The volume name of the USB drive the users have access to Volume 1 8 is mapping to USB port1 and Volume 9 16 is mapping to USB port2 gt Capacity The storage capacity of the USB driver gt Used The used space of the USB driver gt Free The available space of the USB driver gt Use The percentage of the used space gt Shared Indicates the shared or non shared status of the volume When the volume is shared you can click the Disable to stop sharing the volume when volume is non shared you can click the Enable button to share the volume Click the Start button to start the Network Sharing service Click the Stop button to stop the Network Sharing service Click the Eject Disk button to safely remove the USB storage device that is connected to USB port This takes the drive offline A message as shown in Figure 4 35 will appear on your web browser when it is safe to detach the USB disk Message from webpage O This operation will disable Media Server Are you sure to continue aa Figure 4 35 Safe Unplug Message Click the Rescan button to start a new scan Follow the instructions below to set up your rout
5. Figure 6 28 User Account Management Only Administrator can use a Web browser to transfer the files from a PC to the Writable shared volume on the USB drive To add a new user account please follow the steps below 1 Click Add New User button and the screen will appear as shown in Figure 6 29 2 Self define a User Name 3 Enter the password in the Password field 4 Choose the Storage Authority from the drop down list Read and Write or Read Only 156 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa Add or Modify User Account User Name admin2 Password admin Storage Authority Read and Write Save Back Figure 6 29 Add or Modify User Account gt User Name Type the user name that you want to give access to the USB drive The user name must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length gt Password Enter the password in the Password field The password must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length For security purposes the password for each user account is not displayed gt Storage Authority Choose Read and Write or Read Only from the drop down list to assign access authority of Storage Sharing to the user gt Save You can click the Save button to save your settings gt Back You can click the Back button to discard the settings and just go to the media server configuration page c Note Please re
6. 9 16 3 Dyndns org DDNS cid A A 250 SS Aaa ea Ae a ae lanai Ae ane ease 251 BALT THM SONGS ii ita 252 3 11 2 IDIAONOS Citi ii di A 253 8 17 23 Firmware Upgrade araisa inc a PARAAN REAR EE SSSA UE AREARE 254 STA Factory Detalla 255 8 17 5 Backup amp Restore ooocoococcococoococococccccocnnononocnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn me nnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnn 256 A A leds 256 817 7 A cesccebeedecet tingle eeii a ia aTr ia aaria aa needle ee aed id 257 9 17 87 SOM LOA E adit ee 258 SITE Statistics A AAA AAA al 258 Appendix A FAO dt 260 Appendix B Configuring the PC oommcccnnccccnonnccninnencnnnnnnecnn nine crecer 265 Appendix C SpecificatiOnS ocoomomionccncnnnnnnnosccnnnncnnnnnnnonecnnnncnnnnnn ronca 268 Appendix D GOS SANY ies ocio h eraa aAA ia 269 VIII TL WR710N MENTE E TN Ve E Ltd To Mm o LL ioa Package Contents The following items should be found in your package gt One TL WR710N 150Mbps Wireless N Mini Pocket Router Advanced Edition gt Quick Installation Guide gt One RJ 45 Ethernet Cable gt One Resource CD for TL WR710N 150Mbps Wireless N Mini Pocket Router Advanced Edition including e User Guide e Other Helpful Information EP Note Make sure that the package contains the above items If any of the listed items is damaged or missing please contact your distributor TL WR710N BRO To CAKE Ck a a Cole C2 mC NYC TL To Mm ao 14 Tola Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Overview of
7. Figure 4 63 Add or Modify a Host Entry For example If you desire to restrict the internet activities of host with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 AA you should first follow the settings below 1 Click Add New button in Figure 4 61 to enter the Add or Modify a Host Entry page 2 In Mode field select MAC Address from the drop down list 3 In Host Description field create a unique description for the host e g Host_1 4 In MAC Address field enter 00 11 22 33 44 AA 5 Click Save to complete the settings Then you will go back to the Host Settings page and see the following list 80 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN e E Tae Mm o LL ioa Host Settings ID Host Description Information Modify 1 Host_1 MAC 00 11 22 33 44 AA Edit Delete Add New Delete All Previous Next Current No 1 v Page Figure 4 64 Host Settings 4 13 3 Target Choose menu Access Control Target you can view and set a Target list in the screen as shown in Figure 4 65 The target list is necessary for the Access Restriction Rule Target Settings 1D Target Description Information Modify Add New Delete All Previous Next Current No 1 v Page Figure 4 65 Target Settings Target Description Here displays the description about the target and this description is unique Information The target can be IP address port or domain name Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To add a new ent
8. 1 Sometimes the connection cannot be disconnected although you specify a time to Max Idle Time since some applications is visiting the Internet continually in the background 2 If you are a Cable user please configure the Router following the above steps 260 2 TL WR710N MENTE IE TT Ve Elle To Mm o LL ioa How do configure the Router to access the Internet by Ethernet users 1 Log in to the Router click the Network menu on the left of your browser and click WAN submenu On the WAN page select Dynamic IP for WAN Connection Type finish by clicking Save Some ISPs require that you register the MAC Address of your adapter which is connected to your cable DSL Modem during installation If your ISP requires MAC register log in to the Router and click the Network menu link on the left of your browser and then click MAC Clone submenu link On the MAC Clone page if your PC s MAC address is proper MAC address click the Clone MAC Address button and your PC s MAC address will fill in the WAN MAC Address field Or else type the MAC Address into the WAN MAC Address field The format for the MAC Address is XX XX XX XX XX XX Then click the Save button It will take effect after rebooting WAN MAC Address 00 1 D OF 01 06 29 Restore Factory MAC Your PC s MAC Address 6C 62 6D F7 31 80 Clone MAC Address Figure A 3 MAC Clone want to use NetMeeting what do I need to do
9. 3 Click the Save button Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry MAC Address Reserved IP Address Status Enabled x Figure 4 32 Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry To modify or delete an existing entry 57 TL WR710N MENDIETA IT Ve AY Tare Mm o Lio 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify the information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable Disable All button to make all entries enabled disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries Click the Next button to go to the next page and Click the Previous button to return the previous page 4 9 USB Settings USB Settings Media Server User Accounts Figure 4 33 The USB Settings menu There are three submenus under the USB Settings menu shown in Figure 4 33 Storage Sharing Media Server and User Accounts Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions 4 9 1 Storage Sharing Choose menu USB Settings Storage Sharing you can configure a USB disk drive attached to the router and view volume and share such properties as share name capacity used space and free space on this page as shown below Storage Sharing Service Status Started C Access shared storage with password Volume Capacity Used Free Use Shared volumet 1 96B 1 3GB 626 MB 67 Eject Disk Rescan
10. LAN MAC Address _00 1D OF 01 06 28 Type Smart IP DHCP IP Address 192 168 0 254 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 v IGMP Proxy Enable Note IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol works for IPT multicast stream The device supports both IGMP proxy with enable or disable option and IGMP snooping Figure 7 5 LAN gt MAC Address The physical address of the LAN ports as seen from the LAN The value can t be changed gt Type Choosing Smart IP DHCP to get IP address from DHCP server or choosing static IP to config IP address manually gt IP Address Enter the IP address of your system in dotted decimal notation factory default 192 168 0 254 gt Subnet Mask An address code that determines the size of the network Normally 255 255 255 0 is used as the subnet mask gt IGMP Proxy The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP feature allows your devices in LAN can watch TV E Note 1 If you change the IP Address of LAN you must use the new IP Address to login to the Router 2 If the new LAN IP Address you set is not in the same subnet with the previous one the IP Address pool in the DHCP server will be configured automatically while the Virtual Server and DMZ Host will not take effect until they are re configured 167 TL WR710N MENTE E TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o Lio 3 When you choose the Smart IP DHCP mode the DHCP Server function will be disabled 7 6 Wireless
11. Message from webpage O This operation will disable Media Server Are you sure to continue aa Figure 8 31 Safe Unplug Message Click the Rescan button to start a new scan Follow the instructions below to set up your router as a file server 1 Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router 2 Click the Rescan button to find the USB drive that has been attached to the router 3 Click the Start button to start the Storage Sharing service 4 Click the Enable button under Shared to enable the disk to share 5 Click the Open the disk to visit the sharing disk E Note 1 The router can automatically locate new USB drive But to display the information about your USB device you need to click the Rescan button manually 2 The new settings will not take effect until you restart the service 216 TL WR710N MENTE MET TN Ve AY Tare Mm o Lio 3 To unplug the USB drive click Eject Disk button first Simply pulling USB drive out of the USB port can cause damage to the device and loss of data 4 Mounted volumes of each USB port are subject to the 8 volume limit So you cannot access more than 8 volumes on the USB storage device 5 If you change the storage settings during the storage connection is established then the changes will not take effect until the router or the client is rebooted 8 8 2 Media Server Choose menu USB Settings Media Server you can create media se
12. Status Enabled Figure 7 15 Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify the information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable Disable All button to make all entries enabled disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries Click the Next button to go to the next page and Click the Previous button to return the previous page 7 8 USB Settings USB Settings Media Server User Accounts Figure 7 16 The USB Settings menu There are three submenus under the USB Settings menu shown in Figure 7 16 Storage Sharing Media Server and User Accounts Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions 7 8 1 Storage Sharing Choose menu USB Settings Storage Sharing you can configure a USB disk drive attached to the router and view volume and share such properties as share name capacity used space and free space on this page as shown below 175 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve Eller To Mm o LL ioa Storage Sharing Service Status Started CO Access shared storage with password Volume Capacity Used Free Use Shared volume 1 96B 1 36B 626 MB 67 Eject Disk Rescan Figure 7 17 Storage Sharing gt Service Status Indicates the Network Sharing service s current status You
13. MAC 3 MAC 4 Your PC s MAC Address 6C 62 6D F 31 81 Add Figure 8 48 Local Management By default the radio button All the PCs on the LAN are allowed to access the Router s Web Based Utility is checked If you want to allow PCs with specific MAC Addresses to access the Setup page of the Router s Web Based Utility locally from inside the network check the radio button Only the PCs listed can browse the built in web pages to perform Administrator tasks and then enter each MAC Address in a separate field The format for the MAC Address is XX XX XX XX XX XX X is any hexadecimal digit Only the PCs with MAC address listed can 229 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o Lio use the password to browse the built in web pages to perform Administrator tasks while all the others will be blocked After click the Add button your PC s MAC Address will be placed in the list above Click the Save button to save your settings E Note If your PC is blocked but you want to access the Router again press and hold the WPS button for more than 5 seconds to reset the Router to factory defaults 8 10 4 Remote Management You can configure the Remote Management function on this page This feature allows you to manage your Router from a remote location via the Internet Remote Management Web Management Port 80 Remote Management IP Address 0 0 0 0 Enter 255 255 255 255
14. Pre encryption prevents unauthorized access from users outside of the network 1 4 Panel Layout L Figure 1 1 TL WR710N sketch TL WR710N BRO To exec ta TT ood k a a Cole C2 E TL To Lo Lii CeT a gt LED Status Indication Solid Green The device is working properly Condition 1 System is booting Blinking Condition 2 The Ethernet Cable or USB Device is connecting to the product Table 1 1 The LED Description USB The USB port connects to a USB storage device gt Reset It is used to reset the Router to its factory defaults With the Router powered on use a pin to press and hold the Reset button about 5 seconds until the SYS LED becomes quick flash from slow flash And then release the button and wait the Router to reboot to its factory default settings gt LAN WAN This LAN WAN port works as LAN in AP Repeater Client WISP Client Router mode and as WAN in Wireless Router mode As LAN it connects the Router to the local PC as WAN it enables you connect the DSL cable Modem or Ethernet gt LAN This LAN port works as LAN in Wireless Router AP Repeater Client WISP Client Router mode It connects the Router to the local PC TL WR710N RENTES TN Ve Eller To Mm o LL ioa Chapter 2 Connecting the Router 2 1 System Requirements Each PC in the LAN needs a working Ethernet Adapter TCP IP protocol must be installed on each PC Web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer
15. Secondary Connection Besides PPPoE if you use an extra connection type to connect to a local area network provided by ISP then parameters of this secondary connection will be shown in this area e IP Address The current WAN Internet IP Address This field will be blank or 0 0 0 0 if the IP Address is assigned dynamically and there is no connection to the Internet 190 TL WR710N MENTE IET LT Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa e Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with the WAN IP Address Click the Release to delete the network parameters and click the Renew button to obtaining network parameters gt Traffic Statistics The Router s traffic statistics e Received Bytes Traffic that counted in bytes has been received out from the WAN port Received Packets Traffic that counted in packets has been received out from the WAN port Sent Bytes Traffic that counted in bytes has been sent out from the WAN port Sent Packets Traffic that counted in packets has been sent out from the WAN port gt System Up Time The length of the time since the Router was last powered on or reset Click the Refresh button to get the latest status and settings of the Router 8 3 Quick Setup Please refer to Section 3 2 Quick Installation Guide 8 4 Working Mode The Router supports five operation mode types Wireless Router Access Point Repeater Client and Wireless Client Router Please select one you want Cli
16. System Tools Diagnostic and then you can transact Ping or Traceroute function to check connectivity of your network in the following screen 181 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o Lio Diagnostic Tools Diagnostic Parameters Diagnostic Tool Ping Traceroute IP Address Domain Name Ping Count 4 1 50 Ping Packet Size 64 4 1472 Bytes Ping Timeout 800 100 2000 Milliseconds Traceroute Max TTL 1 30 Diagnostic Results o ala The Router is ready Figure 7 26 Diagnostic Tools gt Diagnostic Tool Check the radio button to select one diagnostic tool e Ping This diagnostic tool troubleshoots connectivity reachability and name resolution to a given host or gateway e Traceroute This diagnostic tool tests the performance of a connection E Note You can use ping traceroute to test both numeric IP address or domain name lf pinging tracerouting the IP address is successful but pinging tracerouting the domain name is not you might have a name resolution problem In this case ensure that the domain name you are specifying can be resolved by using Domain Name System DNS queries gt IP Address Domain Name Type the destination IP address e g 202 108 22 5 or Domain name e g http www tp link com gt Pings Count The number of Ping packets for a Ping connection The default is 4 gt Ping Packet Size The size of Ping packet The
17. gt Use The percentage of the used space 152 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AY Tare Mm o Lio gt Shared Indicates the shared or non shared status of the volume When the volume is shared you can click the Disable to stop sharing the volume when volume is non shared you can click the Enable button to share the volume Click the Start button to start the Network Sharing service Click the Stop button to stop the Network Sharing service Click the Eject Disk button to safely remove the USB storage device that is connected to USB port This takes the drive offline A message as shown in Figure 6 23 will appear on your web browser when it is safe to detach the USB disk Message from webpage O This operation will disable Media Server Are you sure to continue Figure 6 23 Safe Unplug Message Click the Rescan button to start a new scan Follow the instructions below to set up your router as a file server 1 Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router 2 Click the Rescan button to find the USB drive that has been attached to the router 3 Click the Start button to start the Storage Sharing service 4 Click the Enable button under Shared to enable the disk to share 5 Click the Open the disk to visit the sharing disk E Note 1 The router can automatically locate new USB drive But to display the information about your USB device you need to click the Rescan button m
18. Click to save all the logs in a txt file gt Mail Log Click to send an email of current logs manually according to the address and validation information set in Mail Settings The result will be shown in the later log soon gt Clear Log All the logs will be deleted from this device permanently not just from the page 4 18 9 Statistics The Statistics page displays the network traffic of each PC in LAN including total traffic and traffic of the last Packets Statistic Interval seconds 101 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa Statistics Current Statistics Status Disabled Packets Statistics Interval 5 60 10 w Seconds Auto refresh Sorted Rules Sorted by Current Bytes Y Reset All Delete All Total Current IP Address MAC Address Packets Bytes Packets Bytes ICMP Tx UDP Tx SYN Tx The current listis empty 5 w entries per page CurrentNo 1 y Page Figure 4 98 Statistics gt Current Statistics Status Enable or Disable The default value is disabled To enable click the Enable button If disabled the function of DoS protection in Security settings will be ineffective gt Packets Statistics Interval The default value is 10 Select a value between 5 and 60 seconds in the pull down list The Packets Statistic interval indicates the time section of the packets statistic gt Sorted Rules Here displays sort as desired Statistics Ta
19. Figure 8 56 Rule Settings 8 12 2 Host Choose menu Access Control Host you can view and set a Host list in the screen as shown in Figure 8 57 The host list is necessary for the Access Restriction Rule Host Settings 1D Host Description Information Modify Add New Delete A Previous Next Current No 4 v Page Figure 8 57 Host Settings gt Host Description Here displays the description of the host and this description is unique gt Information Here displays the information about the host It can be IP or MAC gt Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To add a new entry please follow the steps below 1 Click the Add New button 2 In the Mode field select IP Address or MAC Address e Ifyou select IP Address the screen shown is Figure 8 58 1 In Host Description field create a unique description for the host e g Host_1 236 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa 2 In LAN IP Address field enter the IP address e If you select MAC Address the screen shown is Figure 8 59 1 In Host Description field create a unique description for the host e g Host_1 2 In MAC Address field enter the MAC address 3 Click the Save button to complete the settings Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table Click the Next button to go to the next page or click the Previous button return to the previous page Add or Modify a
20. VI 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 8 14 8 15 8 16 8 8 1 Storage Shanga ita A ae eee 215 age Media SoN e 217 3 03 User Account 219 F rwarding NN 220 39 91 Virtual SCMVClSxeak deeded arlene it aida 221 39 20 PON Eggerin aE RRE EE EEOAE teas E EA E O tela 222 O V VAATE EA ET A AS T E artes 224 8 9 4 UPOP sioner alates Maen ain Mea ee eee 225 DECUMLY ASE EP E E sini E reat haa Set cee eA raat Nan hee eee erase aaa 226 8 10 1 Basic Security ici id id dd ARAE ESERE EEES 226 810 2 Advanced ecu icon ico ifconfig 227 8 1073 Local Management imitan 229 8 10 4 Remote ManageMent ococccccncocccccononcncnononcnncnononcnnnnnoncnnnnnn nn cn naar acc cn naar nncnnnannncnnnns 230 Parental Controls oirean hades cevedede dnde db dd dba aaa 231 Access Control iuris ores Me 233 8 12 RU o errr aor a ere a rer 233 8 1224 11 a io e nt ea 236 312 Mag a A dd 238 8 12 4 Schedule iia tae 240 Advanced ROUNO dit 242 8 13 1 Static Routing Lis tucan ccoo 242 8 13 2 System Routing Table icons E 243 BandwidthGontrol na sion ondaa dada E arenas 244 8 1421 Control Settings cti tide 244 8 142 RUIS Sta sti avira Seite a ie ee eee ei 244 IP amp MAC Binding saciuhart oe ae ae ei Slee i 246 8151 Binding Seg aE E ees EAEE AE AERE AE EAEE eases baie 246 8 15 2 CARPAS ees tes aa aa a A A A a 248 DY MAIMIC DN Pe A E E E E E E T E E E E E E nai 248 8 16 1 No lP IDON Si A a ee 249 8 16 2 Comexe cn DDNS oecon ranie dd idad 249 VII
21. a new dynamic IP address will be automatically assigned to the user 56 TL WR710N MENTE IET TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o Lio a You cannot change any of the values on this page To update this page and to show the current attached devices click the Refresh button 4 8 3 Address Reservation Choose menu DHCP Address Reservation and then you can view and add a reserved address for clients via the next screen shown in Figure 4 31 When you specify a reserved IP address for a PC on the LAN that PC will always receive the same IP address each time when it accesses the DHCP server Reserved IP addresses should be assigned to the servers that require permanent IP settings Address Reservation 1D MAC Address Reserved IP Address Status Modify 1 00 11 22 33 44 AA 192 168 0 169 Enabled Modify Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure 4 31 Address Reservation gt MAC Address The MAC address of the PC for which you want to reserve an IP address gt Reserved IP Address The IP address reserved for the PC by the Router gt Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled gt Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To Reserve an IP address 1 Click the Add New button Then will pop up 2 Enter the MAC address in XX XX XX XX XX XX format and IP address in dotted decimal notation of the computer for which you want to reserve an IP address
22. gt ALG It is recommended to enable Application Layer Gateway ALG because ALG allows customized Network Address Translation NAT traversal filters to be plugged into the gateway to support address and port translation for certain application layer control data protocols such as FTP TFTP H323 etc e FTP ALG To allow FTP clients and servers to transfer data across NAT keep the default Enable e TFTP ALG To allow TFTP clients and servers to transfer data across NAT keep the default Enable e H323 ALG To allow Microsoft NetMeeting clients to communicate across NAT keep the default Enable Click the Save button to save your settings 4 11 2 Advanced Security Choose menu Security Advanced Security you can protect the Router from being attacked by TCP SYN Flood UDP Flood and ICMP Flood in the screen as shown in Figure 4 51 70 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve Elle To fm o LL ioa Advanced Security Packets Statistics Interval 5 60 10 v Seconds DoS Protection Disable Enable Enable ICMP FLOOD Attack Filtering ICMP FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 s Packets Secs Enable UDP FLOOD Filtering UDP FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 500 Packets Secs Enable TCP SYN FLOOD Attack Filtering TCP SYN FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 50 Packets Secs Ignore Ping Packet from WAN Port to Router Forbid Ping Packet from LAN Portto Router Figure 4 51 Advanced Security gt P
23. the Virtual Servers submenu On the Virtual Servers page click Add New then on the Add or Modify a Virtual Server page enter 88 into the blank next to the Service Port and your IP address next to the IP Address assuming 192 168 0 188 for an example remember to Enable and Save Virtual Servers ID Service Port Internal Port IP Address Protocol Status Modify 1 88 88 192 168 0 188 All Enabled Modify Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure A 8 Virtual Servers 263 TL WR710N MENUITEM TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa Add or Modify a Virtual Server Entry Service Port OA or XX Internal Port XX Only valid for single Service Port or leave it blank IP Address Protocol All v Status Enabled Y Common Service Port Select One Y Figure A 9 Add or Modify a Virtual server Entry The wireless stations cannot connect to the Router 1 Make sure the Enable Wireless Router Radio is checked 2 Make sure that the wireless stations SSID accord with the Router s SSID 3 Make sure the wireless stations have right KEY for encryption when the Router is encrypted 4 Ifthe wireless connection is ready but you can t access the Router check the IP Address of your wireless stations 264 TL WR710N MENTE IE IT TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa Appendix B Configuring the PC In this section we ll introduce
24. 1 2 If you start NetMeeting as a sponsor you don t need to do anything with the Router If you start as a response you need to configure Virtual Server or DMZ Host and make sure the H323 ALG is enabled How to configure Virtual Server Log in to the Router click the Forwarding menu on the left of your browser and click Virtual Servers submenu On the Virtual Servers page click Add New Then on the Add or Modify a Virtual Server Entry page enter 1720 for the Service Port blank and your IP address for the IP Address blank taking 192 168 0 169 for an example remember to Enable and Save 261 TL WR710N MENTE ME IT TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o Lio Virtual Servers ID Service Port Internal Port IP Address Protocol Status Modify 4 1720 1720 192 168 0 169 All Enabled Modify Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure A 4 Virtual Servers Add or Modify a Virtual Server Entry Service Port TES XX XX OF XX Internal Port Po XX Only valid for single Service Port or leave it blank IP Address OOOO O Protocol All he Status Enabled v Common Service Port Select One Y Figure A 5 Add or Modify a Virtual server Entry GP Note Your opposite side should call your WAN IP which is displayed on the Status page 4 How to enable DMZ Host Log in to the Router click the Forwarding menu on the
25. 64 _ 4 1472 Bytes Ping Timeout 800 100 2000 Milliseconds Traceroute Max TTL 20 1 30 Diagnostic Results This device is ready Figure 6 31 Diagnostic Tools gt Diagnostic Tool Check the radio button to select one diagnostic tool 158 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa e Ping This diagnostic tool troubleshoots connectivity reachability and name resolution to a given host or gateway e Traceroute This diagnostic tool tests the performance of a connection E Note You can use ping traceroute to test both numeric IP address or domain name If pinging tracerouting the IP address is successful but pinging tracerouting the domain name is not you might have a name resolution problem In this case ensure that the domain name you are specifying can be resolved by using Domain Name System DNS queries gt IP Address Domain Name Type the destination IP address e g 202 108 22 5 or Domain name e g http www tp link com Pings Count The number of Ping packets for a Ping connection The default is 4 gt Ping Packet Size The size of Ping packet The default is 64 gt Ping Timeout Set the waiting time for the reply of each Ping packet If there is no reply in the specified time the connection is overtime The default is 800 gt Traceroute Max TTL The max number of hops for a Traceroute connection The default is 20 Click Start to check the connecti
26. Choose menu Forwarding Virtual Servers and then you can view and add virtual servers in the screen as shown in Figure 4 43 Virtual servers can be used for setting up public services on your LAN such as DNS Email and FTP A virtual server is defined as a service port and all requests from the Internet to this service port will be redirected to the computer specified by the server IP Any PC that was used for a virtual server must have a static or reserved IP Address because its IP Address may be changed when using the DHCP function Virtual Servers ID Service Port Internal Port IP Address Protocol Status Modify Add New Enable Al Disable All Delete A Previous Next Figure 4 43 Virtual Servers gt Service Port The numbers of External Ports You can type a service port or a range of service ports in XXX YYY format XXX is the start port number YYY is the end port number gt Internal Port The Internal Service Port number of the PC running the service application You can leave it blank if the Internal Port is the same as the Service Port or enter a specific port number when Service Port is a single one gt IP Address The IP Address of the PC providing the service application gt Protocol The protocol used for this application either TCP UDP or All all protocols supported by the Router gt Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled gt Modify To modify
27. Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions 5 9 1 Storage Sharing Choose menu USB Settings Storage Sharing you can configure a USB disk drive attached to the router and view volume and share such properties as share name capacity used space and free space on this page as shown below 123 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve Eller To Mm o LL ioa Storage Sharing Service Status Started CO Access shared storage with password Volume Capacity Used Free Use Shared volume 1 96B 1 36B 626 MB 67 Eject Disk Rescan Figure 5 25 Storage Sharing gt Service Status Indicates the Network Sharing service s current status You can click the Start button to start the Storage Sharing service and click the Stop button to stop it gt Volume The volume name of the USB drive the users have access to Volume 1 8 is mapping to USB port1 and Volume 9 16 is mapping to USB port2 gt Capacity The storage capacity of the USB driver gt Used The used space of the USB driver gt Free The available space of the USB driver gt Use The percentage of the used space gt Shared Indicates the shared or non shared status of the volume When the volume is shared you can click the Disable to stop sharing the volume when volume is non shared you can click the Enable button to share the volume Click the Start button to start the Network Sharing service Click the St
28. Enable A Disable Al Delete All Previous Next Figure 6 11 Wireless MAC Filtering To filter wireless users by MAC Address click Enable The default setting is Disabled gt MAC Address The wireless station s MAC address that you want to access gt Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled gt Description A simple description of the wireless station To Add a Wireless MAC Address filtering entry click the Add New button The Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry page will appear shown in Figure 6 12 144 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve E Tae Mm o LL ioa Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry MAC Address Description Status Enabled v Figure 6 12 Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry To add or modify a MAC Address Filtering entry follow these instructions 1 Enter the appropriate MAC Address into the MAC Address field The format of the MAC Address is XX XX XX XX XX XX X is any hexadecimal digit For example 00 0A EB BO 00 0B 2 Give a simple description for the wireless station in the Description field For example Wireless station A 3 Select Enabled or Disabled for this entry on the Status pull down list 4 Click the Save button to save this entry To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify t
29. How do configure the Router to access the Internet by ADSL users 1 First configure the ADSL Modem configured in RFC1483 bridge model 2 Connect the Ethernet cable from your ADSL Modem to the WAN port on the Router The telephone cord plugs into the Line port of the ADSL Modem 3 Log in to the Router click the Network menu on the left of your browser and click WAN submenu On the WAN page select PPPoE Russia PPPoE for WAN Connection Type Type user name in the User Name field and password in the Password field and the Confirm Password field and finish it by clicking Connect WAN Connection Type PPPoE Russia PPPoE x PPPoE Connection User Name username Password ssssssna Confirm Password s s Figure A 1 PPPoE Connection Type 4 If your ADSL lease is in pay according time mode select Connect on Demand or Connect Manually for Internet connection mode Type an appropriate number for Max Idle Time to avoid wasting paid time Otherwise you can select Auto connecting for Internet connection mode Wan Connection Mode O Connecton Demand Connect Automatically Time based Connecting Period of Time from o g HH MM to 23 leg HH MM O Connect Manually Max Idle Time 15 minutes 0 means remain active at all times Disconnect Disconnected Figure A 2 PPPoE Connection Mode 3 Note
30. If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify the information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable Disable All button to make all entries enabled disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries Click the Next button to go to the next page and click the Previous button to return the previous page cf Note If you set the service port of the virtual server as 80 you must set the Web management port on Security Remote Management page to be any other value except 80 such as 8080 Otherwise there will be a conflict to disable the virtual server 8 9 2 Port Triggering Choose menu Forwarding Port Triggering and then you can view and add port triggering in the screen as shown in Figure 8 41 Some applications require multiple connections like Internet games video conferencing Internet calling and so on These applications cannot work 222 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AY Tale Mm o Lio with a pure NAT Router Port Triggering is used for some of these applications that can work with an NAT Router Port Triggering ID Trigger Port Trigger Protocol Incoming Ports Incoming Protocol Status Modify Add New Enable Al Disable A Delete All Previous Next Figure 8 41 Port Triggering Once the Router is configured the operation is as follows 1 A local host makes an outgoing connection using a destination port number defined in the Trigger Port field Th
31. Network Address Translation NAT technology translates IP addresses of a local area network to a different IP address for the Internet 269 TL WR710N BRO Te eee ta TT ood U o AYZ Taree Mm ato 14 Tola PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE is a protocol for connecting remote hosts to the Internet over an always on connection by simulating a dial up connection SSID A Service Set Identification is a thirty two character maximum alphanumeric key identifying a wireless local area network For the wireless devices in a network to communicate with each other all devices must be configured with the same SSID This is typically the configuration parameter for a wireless PC card It corresponds to the ESSID in the wireless Access Point and to the wireless network name WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy A data privacy mechanism based on a 64 bit or 128 bit or 152 bit shared key algorithm as described in the IEEE 802 11 standard Wi Fi A trade name for the 802 11b wireless networking standard given by the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance WECA see http www wi fi net an industry standards group promoting interoperability among 802 11b devices WLAN Wireless Local Area Network A group of computers and associated devices communicate with each other wirelessly which network serving users are limited in a local area 270
32. Prevolus Next Current No 1 v Page Figure 4 69 Schedule Settings gt Schedule Description Here displays the description of the schedule and this description is unique gt Day Here displays the day s in a week gt Time Here displays the time period in a day gt Modify Here you can edit or delete an existing schedule To add a new schedule follow the steps below 1 Click Add New button shown in Figure 4 69 and the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 4 70 2 In Schedule Description field create a unique description for the schedule e g Schedule_1 wo In Day field select the day or days you need 4 In Time field you can select all day 24 hours or you may enter the Start Time and Stop Time in the corresponding field 5 Click Save to complete the settings Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table 83 TL WR710N 150Mbps Wireless N Mini Pocket Router Advanced Edition Click the Next button to go to the next page or click the Previous button return to the previous page Schedule Description Advance Schedule Settings Note The Schedule is based on the time ofthe Router Day Everyday Select Days Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat sun Time all day 24 hours Start Time HHMM Stop Time HHMI Save Back Figure 4 70 Advanced Schedule Settings MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 AA to access www google com only from 18 00
33. The Status page provides the current status information about the Router on Wireless Router Mode All information is read only 27 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TT Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa Firmware Version 3 14 4 Build 130128 Rel 36510n Hardware Version WR710N v1 00000000 LAN MAC Address 00 1D OF 01 06 28 IP Address 192 168 0 254 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Wireless Working Mode Wireless Router Wireless Radio Enable Name SSID TP LINK_2046F2 Mode 11bgn mixed Channel Width Automatic Channel Auto Current channel 6 MAC Address 00 1 D OF 01 06 28 WDS Status Disable WAN MAC Address 00 1 D OF 01 06 29 IP Address 0 0 0 0 Dynamic IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 WAN port is unplugged DNS Server 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Traffic Statistics Received Sent Bytes 0 0 Packets 0 0 System Up Time 0 days 02 50 11 Figure 4 2 Firmware Version The version information of the Router s firmware Hardware Version The version information of the Router s hardware LAN This field displays the current settings or information for the LAN you can configure them in the Network gt LAN page e MAC Address The physical address of the Router as seen from the LAN e IP Address The LAN IP address of the Router e Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with LAN IP address 28 TL WR710N BRO To eee te TT ood Ae TL To MN ao Lii Tola gt Wireless This field displays basic inform
34. The current value of the device s PIN is displayed here The default PIN of the device can be found in the label or User Guide gt Restore PIN Restore the PIN of the device to its default gt Gen New PIN Click this button and then you can get a new random value for the device s PIN You can ensure the network security by generating a new PIN gt Disable PIN of this Device WPS external registrar of entering the device s PIN can be disabled or enabled manually If the device receives multiple failed attempts to authenticate an external Registrar this function will be disabled automatically gt Add Device You can add a new device to the existing network manually by clicking this button To add a new device If the wireless adapter supports Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS you can establish a wireless connection between wireless adapter and device using either Push Button Configuration PBC method or PIN method 30 TL WR710N MENTE MET TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa Note To build a successful connection by WPS you should also do the corresponding configuration of the new device for WPS function meanwhile For the configuration of the new device here takes the Wireless Adapter of our company for example Il By PBC If the wireless adapter supports Wi Fi Protected Setup and the Push Button Configuration PBC method you can add it to the network by PBC with the following two methods Method One Step
35. To Reserve an IP address 1 Click the Add New button Then will pop up 2 Enter the MAC address in XX XX XX XX XX XX format and IP address in dotted decimal notation of the computer for which you want to reserve an IP address 3 Click the Save button Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry MAC Address Reserved IP Address Status Enabled x Figure 8 28 Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry 214 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN e AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify the information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable Disable All button to make all entries enabled disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries Click the Next button to go to the next page and Click the Previous button to return the previous page 8 8 USB Settings USB Settings Media Server User Accounts Figure 8 29 The USB Settings menu There are three submenus under the USB Settings menu shown in Figure 8 29 Storage Sharing Media Server and User Accounts Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions 8 8 1 Storage Sharing Choose menu USB Settings Storage Sharing you can configure a USB disk drive attached to the router and view volume and share such properties as share name capacity u
36. gt WAN Connection Type gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish User Name username Password ssaeaene Confirm Password sss Net Figure 3 21 Quick Setup PPPOE gt Dynamic IP Your ISP uses a DHCP service to assign your Router an IP address for connecting to the Internet When the Router connects to a DHCP server or the ISP supplies you with DHCP connection please choose this type If you choose this type of connection no configuration should be set and you can go on with the wireless configuration in Figure 3 23 gt Static IP This type of connection uses a permanent fixed static IP address that your ISP assigned In this type you should fill in the IP address Subnet Mask Default Gateway and DNS IP address manually which are specified by your ISP Then click Next and proceed to Figure 3 23 Quick Setup Static IP Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt Ah Connection Type gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 Optional Next Figure 3 22 Quick Setup Static IP 2 You can configure the basic settings for the wireless network on this page 24 TL WR710N MENUITEM TN Ve E Tare Mm o Lio Quick Setup Wireless Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt WAN Connection
37. or 152 bit for encryption Disabled means this WEP key entry is invalid 64 bit You can enter 10 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 5 ASCII characters 128 bit You can enter 26 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 13 ASCII characters 207 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa 152 bit You can enter 32 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 16 ASCII characters ce Note If you do not set the key the wireless security function is still disabled even if you have selected Shared Key as Authentication Type Be sure to click the Save button to save your settings on this page 8 6 3 Wireless MAC Filtering Choose menu Wireless Wireless MAC Filtering and then you can control the wireless access by configuring the Wireless MAC Filtering function as shown in Figure 8 19 Wireless MAC Filtering Wireless MAC Filtering Enabled Filtering Rules Deny the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access ID MAC Address Status Description Modify Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure 8 19 Wireless MAC Filtering To filter wireless users by MAC Address click Enable The default setting is Disabled gt MAC Address The wireless
38. 1 Keep the WPS Status as Enabled and click the Add Device button in Figure 4 3 then the following screen will appear Add A New Device Enter the new device s PIN PIN rress the button of the new device in two minutes Figure 4 4 Add A New Device Step 2 Choose Press the button of the new device in two minutes and click Connect Step 3 For the configuration of the wireless adapter please choose Push the button on my access point or wireless router in the configuration utility of the WPS as below and click Connect Status Network Profile Advanced w This application will guide you through configuring your wireless network Please choose a method to join a wireless network Push the button on my access point or wireless router Enter the PIN of my access point or wireless router Enter the PIN of this device into my access point or wireless router Connect The WPS Configuration Screen of Wireless Adapter 31 TL WR710N BRO Toye Tic ert BUT ee a Cole C MMA AE LaTe Mm e LoLa Step 4 Wait for a while until the next screen appears Click OK to complete the WPS configuration Configuring the wireless network Successfully connected to the network by WPS The WPS Configuration Screen of Wireless Adapter Method Two Enter the PIN into my AP Step 1 For the configuration of the wireless adapter please choose Enter the PIN of this device into my access poi
39. 26 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 13 ASCII characters 50 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa 152 bit You can enter 32 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 16 ASCII characters ce Note If you do not set the key the wireless security function is still disabled even if you have selected Shared Key as Authentication Type Be sure to click the Save button to save your settings on this page 4 7 3 Wireless MAC Filtering Choose menu Wireless Wireless MAC Filtering and then you can control the wireless access by configuring the Wireless MAC Filtering function as shown in Figure 4 23 Wireless MAC Filtering Wireless MAC Filtering Enabled Filtering Rules Deny the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access ID MAC Address Status Description Modify Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure 4 23 Wireless MAC Filtering To filter wireless users by MAC Address click Enable The default setting is Disable gt MAC Address The wireless station s MAC address that you want to access gt Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disable gt Description A simple description of the wireless station To Add a Wireless MAC Address filtering entry click the Ad
40. Aa Aas 140 60 2 Wireless Securities ARRE 142 6 6 3 Wireless MAG FiNGring isicccectstes a a 144 IV 6 7 6 8 6 9 Chapter 7 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 6 6 5 Wireless StatistiCS ai aa a 147 DAPR AAA ete eed 148 07 1 DAHGP Setings oir id eae eee cea 148 6 1 2 DACP CEt List ra eipig aei e aA adie Meee ait Siete 150 6 7 9 Address Reservation died 150 USB SONS e maa E E A EEN 152 6 8 1 Storage Sharing einernie tiina orir E en dd dd did 152 6 8 2 Media Server iniciado ierra anA a ATAKAA dd aiara iaa DEAE 154 6 8 3 USORACCOUM Sitioco cid id ARA DENNA NAANA AAEE Eia rE EEE 156 OVS OM TOGE corts A E O T T 158 6 91 Diagnostic A AAEE tare ariel 158 69 2 Firmware Upgrade iii ENEA R eee eee 159 6 9 3 Factory Defaults yera o e a a A e a AA 160 6 9 4 Backup Restore urticaria 161 09 09 ARODOO traicionada E ede er te 162 0 96 PASS WOTde inicia rd roads 162 6 9 System A nnd An nie PERE A EEES ded EAEE 163 Configuration for Client Mode ccceccceseereeeeeseeeeeseeeeseseeneeseseeneesesesneesesesneesenesenenees 164 LO Mierda ici EAEE 164 SAUS e A a da daci n 164 QUICK SUP A E RR E E 166 Working Mode isc AA 166 NeWorkK costar dido 167 TOM CLAN conidios dad 167 Wireless comio ib ie des io o deve E nidos ecos edo tthe 0d 168 ON Wireless Settings idad ad ira 168 6 2 Wireless ECU iii od 169 DACP ii E DA E ee eel 172 LAY DACP Settings aites ai td dlls i 172 G2 DACP Client List
41. Advanced Transmit Power High Beacon Interval Moo 40 1000 RTS Threshold 2346 256 2346 Fragmentation Threshold 2346 256 2346 DTIM Interval 1 1 265 Enable WMM Enable Short Gl C Enable AP Isolation Figure 5 16 Wireless Advanced gt Transmit Power Here you can specify the transmit power of Router You can select High Middle or Low which you would like High is the default setting and is recommended gt Beacon Interval Enter a value between 20 1000 milliseconds for Beacon Interval here The beacons are the packets sent by the Router to synchronize a wireless network Beacon Interval value determines the time interval of the beacons The default value is 100 gt RTS Threshold Here you can specify the RTS Request to Send Threshold If the packet is larger than the specified RTS Threshold size the Router will send RTS frames to a particular receiving station and negotiate the sending of a data frame The default value is 2346 gt Fragmentation Threshold This value is the maximum size determining whether packets will be fragmented Setting the Fragmentation Threshold too low may result in poor network performance because of excessive packets 2346 is the default setting and is recommended gt DTIM Interval This value determines the interval of the Delivery Traffic Indication Message DTIM A DTIM field is a countdown field informing clients of the next window for listening to b
42. Bandwidth Control Rule List Figure 8 72 The Bandwidth Control menu There are two submenus under the Bandwidth Control menu as shown in Figure 8 72 Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below 8 14 1 Control Settings Choose menu Bandwidth Control Control Settings you can configure the Egress Bandwidth and Ingress Bandwidth in the next screen Their values you configure should be less than 100000Kbps For optimal control of the bandwidth please select the right Line Type and ask your ISP for the total bandwidth of the egress and ingress Bandwidth Control Settings Enable Bandwidth Control o Line Type ADSL O Other Egress Bandwidth 512 Kbps Ingress Bandwidth 2048 Kbps Figure 8 73 Bandwidth Control Settings gt Enable Bandwidth Control Check this box so that the Bandwidth Control settings can take effect gt Line Type Select the right type for you network connection If you don t know how to choose please ask your ISP for the information gt Egress Bandwidth The upload speed through the WAN port gt ingress Bandwidth The download speed through the WAN port 8 14 2 Rule List Choose menu Bandwidth Control Rule List you can view and configure the Bandwidth Control rules in the screen below 244 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AY Tare Mm o LL ioa B
43. Chapter 6 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 Jf Wireless matting S eni can dein A cena 112 27 2 Wireless DOCU id E E de tee ie 113 5 7 3 Wireless MAC Filtering cc ccccccccceeedieeceescdeeddeedenecensedeetdensddceddeeuenesenseceenavedsaestestee 116 5 7 4 Wireless Advanced oia 118 9 10 Wireless Statist ii ATA AATA 119 DHG P atin tet iit a A 0 120 5 89 11 DACP Settings ii anukashesesiaathastaeeuahgaletavaaeniadadeeteheaedas 120 5 8 2 DHCP Client Listin el edie eden 121 5 8 3 Address ReseivatiON cuido ld did ad 122 USB SEMMIS aia 123 9 9 1 Storage Ma ista EAE 123 59 2 Media SO cistitis teeestaepieetiagiccuansa dientes 125 9 93 USEFACCOUNIS iiaa ap tidad tidad 127 SA I E E E 129 OOM Diagnostic todas 129 5 10 2 Firmware Upgrade decided td NT aida OREA nics de oes 131 5 10 3 Factory Detalla tandil NTO EA inde a gels 132 5 10 4 Backup amp Restore za ea a ea a ea aa aa anar mn nnnn cnn a aai a 132 5 10 5 Reboot inital es O AR 133 5 10 6 PaSSword 2s aet eantata dd add idad 134 S IOT SYSTEM LO ao E E RE AE E EE 135 Configuration for Repeater Mode ccccessescceseeceseseeeeeseseeeseeseeneesesesneeseseseensesseneneees 136 OG IN 5 32 boon teets A aci 136 SUALUS EE PENA EE AE E A tah tates O I A EET fe bent edo et ca f 136 Ele ESTE t o NE ET A E E A S 138 WorkinG MOG eaa iii 138 ETa a AROA E A E E A T E T A ate 139 oea PAN a A A A E 139 AVTTOLESS AA A AR A E 140 6 60 11 Wireless Settings mitin at tein
44. Click the Upgrade button gt Firmware Version Displays the current firmware version gt Hardware Version Displays the current hardware version The hardware version of the upgrade file must accord with the current hardware version Note The firmware version must correspond to the hardware The upgrade process takes a few minutes and the Router will restart automatically when the upgrade is completed It is important to keep power on during the entire process Loss of power during the upgrade could damage the Router 4 18 4 Factory Defaults This page allows you to restore the factory default settings for the router Factory Defaults Click the following button to reset all configuration settings to their default values Figure 4 93 Restore Factory Default Click the Restore button to reset all configuration settings to their default values gt The default User Name admin gt The default Password admin gt The default access tplinklogin net E Note Any settings you have saved will be lost when the default settings are restored 98 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa 4 18 5 Backup 8 Restore This page allows you to save current configuration of router as backup or restore the configuration file you saved before Backup 8 Restore Configuration Backup Backup Configuration Fie Figure 4 94 Backup amp Restore Configuration gt Click the Backup but
45. Figure 4 86 Comexe cn DDNS Settings To set up for DDNS follow these instructions 1 Type the Domain Name received from your dynamic DNS service provider 2 Type the User Name for your DDNS account 3 Type the Password for your DDNS account 4 Click the Login button to log in to the DDNS service Connection Status The status of the DDNS service connection is displayed here Click Logout to log out of the DDNS service 4 17 3 Dyndns org DDNS If the dynamic DNS Service Provider you select is www dyndns org the page will appear as shown in Figure 4 87 93 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa Service Provider Dyndns www dyndns org Goto register User Name username Password s s Domain Name O Enable DONS Connection Status DDNS not launching Figure 4 87 Dyndns org DDNS Settings To set up for DDNS follow these instructions 1 Type the User Name for your DDNS account Type the Password for your DDNS account Type the Domain Name you received from dynamic DNS service provider here e oO N Click the Login button to log in to the DDNS service Connection Status The status of the DDNS service connection is displayed here Click Logout to logout of the DDNS service 4 18 System Tools System Tools Diagnostic Firmware Upgrade Factory Defaults Backup amp Restore Reboot Password System L
46. Figure 5 21 121 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL io DHCP Client List ID Client Name MAC Address Assigned IP Lease Time 1 tplink14129 6C 62 6D F7 31 8D 192 168 0 100 01 15 47 2 Unknown 70 73 CB 1F C8 C9 192 168 0 101 01 56 32 Figure 5 21 DHCP Client List gt Client Name The name of the DHCP client gt MAC Address The MAC address of the DHCP client gt Assigned IP The IP address that the Router has allocated to the DHCP client gt Lease Time The time of the DHCP client leased After the dynamic IP address has expired a new dynamic IP address will be automatically assigned to the user You cannot change any of the values on this page To update this page and to show the current attached devices click the Refresh button 5 8 3 Address Reservation Choose menu DHCP Address Reservation and then you can view and add a reserved address for clients via the next screen shown in Figure 5 22 When you specify a reserved IP address for a PC on the LAN that PC will always receive the same IP address each time when it accesses the DHCP server Reserved IP addresses should be assigned to the servers that require permanent IP settings Address Reservation ID MAC Address Reserved IP Address Status Modify 1 00 11 22 33 44 AA 192 168 0 169 Enabled Modify Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure 5 22 Address Reservation gt MAC Addre
47. Here To Add New Schedule 234 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa In the Action field select Deny or Allow In the Status field select Enabled or Disabled to enable or disable your entry Click the Save button Click the Enable All button to enable all the rules in the list Click the Disable All button to disable all the rules in the list Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table You can change the entry s order as desired Fore entries are before hind entries Enter the ID number in the first box you want to move and another ID number in second box you want to move to and then click the Move button to change the entry s order Click the Next button to go to the next page or click the Previous button return to the previous page Add Internet Access Control Entry Rule Name Host g Click Here To Add New Host List Target Any Target Y Click Here To Add New Target List Schedule Anytime V Click Here To Add New Schedule Status Enabled save Back Figure 8 55 Add or Modify Internet Access Restriction Entry For example If you desire to allow the host with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 AA to access www google com only from 18 00 to 20 00 on Saturday and Sunday and forbid other hosts in the LAN to access the Internet you should follow the settings below 1 Click Access Restriction Host in the left to enter the Host Settings
48. Host Entry Mode IP Address Sj Host Description LAN IP Address le Figure 8 58 Add or Modify a Host Entry Add or Modify a Host Entry Mode MAC Address Y Host Description MAC Address Figure 8 59 Add or Modify a Host Entry For example If you desire to restrict the internet activities of host with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 AA you should first follow the settings below 1 Click Add New button in Figure 8 57 to enter the Add or Modify a Host Entry page 2 In Mode field select MAC Address from the drop down list 3 In Host Description field create a unique description for the host e g Host_1 4 In MAC Address field enter 00 11 22 33 44 AA 5 Click Save to complete the settings Then you will go back to the Host Settings page and see the following list 237 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN e E Tae Mm o LL ioa Host Settings ID Host Description Information Modify 1 Host_1 MAC 00 11 22 33 44 AA Edit Delete Add New Delete All Previous Next Current No 1 v Page Figure 8 60 Host Settings 8 12 3 Target Choose menu Access Control Target you can view and set a Target list in the screen as shown in Figure 4 65 The target list is necessary for the Access Restriction Rule Target Settings 1D Target Description Information Modify Add New Delete All Previous Next Current No 1 v Page Figure 8 61 Targe
49. Load Delete Bind All Load All Refresh Figure 4 84 ARP List gt MAC Address The MAC address of the controlled computer in the LAN gt IP Address The assigned IP address of the controlled computer in the LAN gt Status Enabled or Disabled of the MAC address and IP address binding gt Configure Load or delete item gt Load Load the item to the IP amp MAC Binding list gt Delete Delete the item Click the Bind All button to bind all the current items available after enable Click the Load All button to load all items to the IP amp MAC Binding list Click the Refresh button to refresh all items c Note An item could not be loaded to the IP amp MAC Binding list if the IP address of the item has been loaded before Error warning will prompt as well Likewise Load All only loads the items without interference to the IP amp MAC Binding list 4 17 Dynamic DNS The Router offers the DDNS Dynamic Domain Name System feature which allows the hosting of a website or e mail server with a fixed domain name named by yourself and a dynamic IP 91 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AY Tae Mm o Lio address and then your friends can connect to your server by entering your domain name no matter what your IP address is Before using this feature you need to sign up for DDNS service providers such as www no ip com www comexe cn or www dyndns org The Dynamic DNS client service provider will give you
50. Login button to log in to the DDNS service Connection Status The status of the DDNS service connection is displayed here Click Logout to logout of the DDNS service 8 17 System Tools System Tools Diagnostic Firmware Upgrade Factory Defaults Backup amp Restore Reboot Password System Log Statistics Figure 8 84 The System Tools menu There are nine submenus under the System Tools menu Time Settings Diagnostic Firmware Upgrade Factory Defaults Backup and Restore Reboot Password System Log and 251 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AY Tale Mm o LL ioa Statistics Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below 8 17 1 Time Settings You can set time manually or get GMT from the Internet for the router on this page Time Settings Time zone GMT 08 00 Beijing Hong Kong Perth Singapore i i Date 1 lo m3 moam Time 1 43 50 HHIMMISS NTP Server 1 0 0 0 0 Optional NTP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Optional C Enable Daylight Saving Start Mar 3rd Sun 2am End Nov 2nd Sun 3am Daylight Saving Status daylight saving is down Note Click the GET GMT to update the time from the internet with the pre defined servers or entering the customized server IP Address or Domain Name in the above frames Save Figure 8 85
51. Max Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number of minutes that you wish to have the Internet connecting last unless a new link is requested Caution Sometimes the connection cannot be disconnected although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background Click the Save button to save your settings If your ISP provides PPTP connection please select PPTP Russia PPTP option And you should enter the following parameters Figure 8 11 199 TL WR710N RENTES TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o Lio WAN Connection Type PPTP Russia PPTP v User Name username Password ss Disconnect Disconnected Dynamic IP O Static IP Server IP Address Name IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 DNS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Internet IP Address 0 0 0 0 Internet DNS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MTU Size in bytes 1420 The default is 1420 do not change unless necessary Max Idle Time 15 minutes 0 means remain active at all times Connection Mode Connect on Demand Connect Automatically O Connect Manually Save Figure 8 11 WAN PPTP Russia PPTP User Name Password Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP These fields are case sensitive Dynamic IP Static IP Choose either as you are given by your ISP and enter the ISP s IP address or the domain name If you choose static IP an
52. NOTICE Network sharing service started 1st day 00 06 23 SHARING NOTICE Network sharing service started 1st day 00 06 20 SHARING NOTICE Network sharing settings changed Time 2013 01 01 1 55 47 6948s H Ver WR710N v1 00000000 S Ver 3 14 4 Build 130128 Rel 36510n 1st day 00 08 06 SHARING NOTICE Network sharing settings changed L 192 168 0 254 M 255 255 255 0 W1 DHCP W 0 0 0 0 M 0 0 0 0 G 0 0 0 0 Mail Log Clear Log EE Next CurrentNo 1 v Page Figure 5 41 System Log gt Refresh Refresh the page to show the latest log list gt Save Log Click to save all the logs in a txt file gt Mail Log Click to send an email of current logs manually according to the address and validation information set in Mail Settings The result will be shown in the later log soon gt Clear Log All the logs will be deleted from this device permanently not just from the page 135 TL WR710N MENTE IET LT Ve AYE Tae Mm o Lio Chapter 6 Configuration for Repeater Mode This chapter will show each Web page s key functions and the configuration way for Repeater Mode of TL WR710N 6 1 Login After your successful login you can configure and manage the device There are main menus on the left of the web based utility Submenus will be available after you click one of the main menus On the right there are the corresponding explanations and instructions Status
53. Or you can choose the MAC address from the All Address in Current LAN drop down list 3 Give a description e g Allow Google for the website allowed to be accessed in the Website Description field 74 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AY Tare Mm o LL ioa 4 Enter the allowed domain name of the website either the full name or the keywords e g google in the Allowed Domain Name field Any domain name with keywords in it e g www google com will be allowed 5 Select from the Effective Time drop down list the schedule e g Schedule_1 you want the entry to take effect If there are not suitable schedules for you click the Schedule in red below to go to the Advance Schedule Settings page and create the schedule you need 6 Inthe Status field you can select Enabled or Disabled to enable or disable your entry 7 Click the Save button Click the Enable All button to enable all the rules in the list Click the Disable All button to disable all the rules in the list Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table Click the Next button to go to the next page or click the Previous button return to the previous page Add or Modify Parental Control Entry The Schedule is based on the time of the Router The time can be set in System Tools gt Time settings MAC Address of Children s PC All MAC Address In Current LAN Please Select hee Website Description Allowed Website Name
54. Partition C Share entire partition Folder Location imy share Select Folder video Figure 7 22 Add New Folder gt Display Name You can enter a display name for the share folder gt Share entire partition Choose this option and then the folders contained in this partition will all be shared gt Folder Location Displays the location of this folder gt Select Check the radio button to select the folder to share gt Folder Displays folders that are in current path gt Upper Click this button to get into the upper folder gt Save Click this button to save your settings and the page will be redirected to the media server configuration page gt Back Click this button to discard the settings and just go to the media server configuration page 4 Click the Scan All button to scan all the share folders immediately You can also select the Auto scan at same time select an auto scan interval time by drop down list In this case the media server will auto scan the share folders Note The max share folders number is 6 If you want share a new folder when the number has been reached to be 6 you can delete a share folder and then add a new one 7 8 3 User Accounts You can specify the user name and password for Storage Sharing users on this page Storage Sharing users can use Internet Explorer to access files on the USB drive 179 TL WR710N MENTE IET TT Ve E Tale Mm o LL ioa The
55. Period Specify the group key update interval in seconds The value should be 30 or above Enter 0 to disable the update WEP It is based on the IEEE 802 11 standard Type you can choose the type for the WEP security on the pull down list The default setting is Automatic which can select Shared Key or Open System authentication type automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request WEP Key Format Hexadecimal and ASCII formats are provided here Hexadecimal format stands for any combination of hexadecimal digits 0 9 a f A F in the specified length ASCII format stands for any combination of keyboard characters in the specified length WEP Key Password Select which of the four keys will be used and enter the matching WEP key that you create Make sure these values are identical on all wireless stations in your network Key Type You can select the WEP key length 64 bit or 128 bit or 152 bit for encryption Disabled means this WEP key entry is invalid 64 bit You can enter 10 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 5 ASCII characters 128 bit You can enter 26 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 13 ASCII characters 171 TL WR710N MENTE IE LT Ve AYE Tale Mm o LLO 152 bit You can enter 32 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 16 ASCII characte
56. Previous Next Figure 5 17 Wireless Statistics MAC Address The connected wireless station s MAC address Current Status The connected wireless station s running status one of STA AUTH STA ASSOC STA JOINED WPA WPA PSK WPA2 WPA2 PSK AP UP AP DOWN Disconnected Received Packets Packets received by the station Sent Packets Packets sent by the station Configure The button is used for loading the item to the Wireless MAC Filtering list You cannot change any of the values on this page To update this page and to show the current connected wireless stations click on the Refresh button 119 TL WR710N RENTES MIE TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa Ifthe numbers of connected wireless stations go beyond one page click the Next button to go to the next page and click the Previous button to return the previous page E Note This page will be refreshed automatically every 5 seconds 5 8 DHCP DHCP Client List Address Reservation Figure 5 18 The DHCP menu There are three submenus under the DHCP menu shown in Figure 5 18 DHCP Settings DHCP Client List and Address Reservation Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 5 8 1 DHCP Settings Choose menu DHCP DHCP Settings and then you can configure the DHCP Server on the page as shown in Figure 5 19 The Router is set up by default as a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server which
57. Quick Setup Working Mode Network Wireless DHCP USB Settings System Tools Figure 6 1 The detailed explanations for each Web page s key function are listed below 6 2 Status The Status page provides the current status information about the Router on Repeater Mode All information is read only 136 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LLO Firmware Version 3 14 4 Build 130128 Rel 36510n Hardware Version WR710N v1 00000000 Wired MAC Address D0 1D 0F 01 06 28 IP Address 192 168 0 254 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Wireless Working Mode Universal Repeater Wireless Name of Root AP TP LINK_Network Channel 4 Mode 11bgn mixed Channel Width Automatic MAC Address 00 1D 0F 01 06 28 Traffic Statistics Received Sent Bytes 0 3 452 Packets 0 14 System Up Time D days 00 02 12 Figure 6 2 Status Firmware Version The version information of the Router s firmware Hardware Version The version information of the Router s hardware Wired This field displays the current settings or information for the LAN you can configure them in the Network gt LAN page e MAC address The physical address of the Router as seen from the LAN e IP address The LAN IP address of the Router e Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with LAN IP address Wireless This field displays basic information or status for wireless function you can configure them in the Wireless gt Wireless Setti
58. TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa When 11bg mixed mode is selected only 11bg mixed wireless stations can connect to the Router lt is strongly recommended that you set the Mode to 11bgn mixed and all of 802 11b g n wireless stations can connect to the Router Note If 11bg mixed mode is selected in the Mode field the Channel Width selecting field will turn grey and the value will become 20M which is unable to be changed gt Channel Width Select any channel width from the pull down list The default setting is automatic which can automatically adjust the channel width for your clients gt Channel This field determines which operating frequency will be used The default channel is set to Auto It is not necessary to change the wireless channel unless you notice interference problems with another nearby access point gt Wireless Security You can configure the security settings of your wireless network e Disable Security The wireless security function can be enabled or disabled If disabled the wireless stations will be able to connect the Router without encryption e WPA PSK WPA2 PSK Input the password of your broadcast SSID e No Change If you chose this option wireless security configuration will not change 3 The Finish page is shown as Figure 3 10 Click the Reboot button to make your wireless configuration take effect and finish the Quick Setup Quick Setup Finish Start gt gt Working Mode gt
59. The DHCP Settings function cannot be configured if you have choosed Smart IP DHCP in Network gt LAN in this situation the device will help you configure the DHCP automaticaly as you need Figure 6 17 DHCP Settings 6 7 2 DHCP Client List Choose menu DHCP DHCP Client List and then you can view the information about the clients attached to the Router in the screen as shown in Figure 6 18 DHCP Client List ID Client Name MAC Address Assigned IP Lease Time 1 tplink14129 C 62 6D F7 31 8D 192 168 0 100 01 15 47 2 Unknown 70 73 CB 1F C8 C9 192 168 0 101 01 56 32 Figure 6 18 DHCP Client List gt Client Name The name of the DHCP client gt MAC Address The MAC address of the DHCP client gt Assigned IP The IP address that the Router has allocated to the DHCP client gt Lease Time The time of the DHCP client leased After the dynamic IP address has expired a new dynamic IP address will be automatically assigned to the user You cannot change any of the values on this page To update this page and to show the current attached devices click the Refresh button 6 7 3 Address Reservation Choose menu DHCP Address Reservation and then you can view and add a reserved address for clients via the next screen shown in Figure 6 19 When you specify a reserved IP address for a PC on the LAN that PC will always receive the same IP address each time when it accesses the DHCP server Reserved IP
60. Threshold This value is the maximum size determining whether packets will be fragmented Setting the Fragmentation Threshold too low may result in poor network performance because of excessive packets 2346 is the default setting and is recommended gt DTIM Interval This value determines the interval of the Delivery Traffic Indication Message DTIM A DTIM field is a countdown field informing clients of the next window for listening to broadcast and multicast messages When the Router has buffered broadcast or multicast messages for associated clients it sends the next DTIM with a DTIM Interval value You can specify the value between 1 255 Beacon Intervals The default value is 1 which indicates the DTIM Interval is the same as Beacon Interval gt Enable WMM WMM function can guarantee the packets with high priority messages being transmitted preferentially It is strongly recommended enabled gt Enable Short GI This function is recommended for it will increase the data capacity by reducing the guard interval time gt Enable AP Isolation This function isolate all connected wireless stations so that wireless stations cannot access each other through WLAN This function will be disabled if WDS Bridge is enabled ct Note If you are not familiar with the setting items in this page it s strongly recommended to keep the provided default values otherwise it may result in lower wireless network performance 6 6 5 Wir
61. User Name Type the user name that you want to give access to the USB drive The user name must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length gt Password Enter the password in the Password field The password must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length For security purposes the password for each user account is not displayed gt Storage Authority Choose Read and Write or Read Only from the drop down list to assign access authority of Storage Sharing to the user gt Save You can click the Save button to save your settings gt Back You can click the Back button to discard the settings and just go to the media server configuration page E Note Please restart the service for the new settings to take effect If you cannot use the new user name and password to access the shares press Windows logo R to open the Run dialog box and type net use 192 168 0 254 delete yes and press Enter 192 168 0 254 is your router s LAN IP address If the LAN IP of the modem connected with your router is 192 168 1 x the default LAN IP of the router will automatically switch from 192 168 0 254 to 192 168 1 254 to avoid IP conflict in this case please try net use 192 168 1 254 delete yes 8 9 Forwarding Forwarding Port Triggering DMZ UPnP Figure 8 38 The Forwarding menu 220 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa The
62. Ver 3 14 4 Build 130128 Rel 36510n 3 tstday 00 08 06 SHARING NOTICE Network sharing settings changed L 192 168 0 254 M 255 255 255 0 W1 DHCP W 0 0 0 0 M 0 0 0 0 G 0 0 0 0 Mail Log Clear Lag Previous Next Current No 1 v Page Figure 8 93 System Log gt Refresh Refresh the page to show the latest log list gt Save Log Click to save all the logs in a txt file gt Mail Log Click to send an email of current logs manually according to the address and validation information set in Mail Settings The result will be shown in the later log soon gt Clear Log All the logs will be deleted from this device permanently not just from the page 8 17 9 Statistics The Statistics page displays the network traffic of each PC in LAN including total traffic and traffic of the last Packets Statistic interval seconds 258 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa Statistics Current Statistics Status Disabled Packets Statistics Interval 5 60 10 w Seconds Auto refresh Sorted Rules Sorted by Current Bytes Y Reset All Delete All Total Current IP Address MAC Address Packets Bytes Packets Bytes ICMP Tx UDP Tx SYN Tx The current listis empty 5 w entries per page CurrentNo 1 y Page Figure 8 94 Statistics gt Current Statistics Status Enable or Disable The default value is disabled To enable click the E
63. Wireless Security Figure 7 6 Wireless menu There are two submenus under the Wireless menu shown in Figure 7 6 Wireless Settings and Wireless Security Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 7 6 1 Wireless Settings Choose menu Wireless Wireless Settings and then you can configure the basic settings for the wireless network on this page Wireless Settings C Enable WDS Wireless Name of Root AP TP LINK_Network MAC Address of Root AP 94 0C 6D 2F 3C BE Region United States ha Warning Ensure you select a correct country to conform local law Incorrect settings may cause interference Enable Wireless Radio Figure 7 7 Wireless Settings Client gt Enable WDS The AP client can connect to AP with WDS enabled or disabled If WDS is enabled all traffic from wired networks will be forwarded in the format of WDS frames consisting of four address fields If WDS is disabled three address frames are used If your AP supports WDS well please enable this option gt Wireless Name of Root AP Enter the SSID of AP that you want to access gt MAC Address of Root AP Enter the MAC address of AP that you want to access gt Region Select your region from the pull down list This field specifies the region where the wireless function of the Router can be used It may be illegal to use the wireless function of the Router in a region other than one
64. addresses should be assigned to the servers that require permanent IP settings 150 gt gt gt TL WR710N MENDIETA TN e AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa Address Reservation 1D MAC Address Reserved IP Address Status Modify 1 00 11 22 33 44 AA 192 168 0 169 Enabled Modify Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure 6 19 Address Reservation MAC Address The MAC address of the PC for which you want to reserve an IP address Reserved IP Address The IP address reserved for the PC by the Router Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To Reserve an IP address 1 2 Click the Add New button Then Figure 6 19 will pop up Enter the MAC address in XX XX XX XX XX XX format and IP address in dotted decimal notation of the computer for which you want to reserve an IP address Click the Save button Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry MAC Address Reserved IP Address Status Enabled v Figure 6 20 Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry To modify or delete an existing entry 1 2 3 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete Modify the information Click the Save button Click the Enable Disable All button to make all entries enabled disabled Click the Delete All button to delete al
65. and to show the current attached devices click the Refresh button 7 7 3 Address Reservation Choose menu DHCP Address Reservation and then you can view and add a reserved address for clients via the next screen shown in Figure 7 14 When you specify a reserved IP address for a PC on the LAN that PC will always receive the same IP address each time when it accesses the DHCP server Reserved IP addresses should be assigned to the servers that require permanent IP settings gt gt Address Reservation 1D MAC Address Reserved IP Address Status Modify 1 00 11 22 33 44 AA 192 168 0 169 Enabled Modify Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure 7 14 Address Reservation MAC Address The MAC address of the PC for which you want to reserve an IP address Reserved IP Address The IP address reserved for the PC by the Router Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To Reserve an IP address 1 Click the Add New button Then Figure 7 15 will pop up 174 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve Eller To Mm o LL ioa 2 Enter the MAC address in XX XX XX XX XX XX format and IP address in dotted decimal notation of the computer for which you want to reserve an IP address 3 Click the Save button Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry MAC Address Reserved IP Address
66. based on the time ofthe Router The time can be setin System Tools gt Time settings MAC Address of Children s PC All MAC Address In Current LAN Please Select hee Website Description Allowed Website Name Effective Time Anytime Y The time schedule can be setin Access Control gt Schedule Status Enabled Y Figure 8 51 Add or Modify Parental Control Entry For example If you desire that the child PC with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 AA can access www google com on Saturday only while the parent PC with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 BB is without any restriction you should follow the settings below 1 Click Parental Control menu on the left to enter the Parental Control Settings page Check Enable and enter the MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 BB in the MAC Address of Parental PC field 232 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN e E Ltd To Mm o Lio 2 Click Access Restriction Schedule on the left to enter the Schedule Settings page Click Add New button to create a new schedule with Schedule Description is Schedule_1 Day is Sat and Time is all day 24 hours 3 Click Parental Control menu on the left to go back to the Add or Modify Parental Control Entry page e Click Add New button e Enter 00 11 22 33 44 AA in the MAC Address of Child PC field e Enter Allow Google in the Website Description field e Enter www google com i
67. between your PC and the Router has failed Of x Microsoft Windows XP Version 5 1 2606 lt C gt Copyright 1985 2661 Microsoft Corp C Documents and Settings English gt ping 192 168 M 254 192 168 9 254 with 32 bytes of data timed out timed out timed out timed out Ping statistics for 192 168 254 Packets Sent 4 Received Lost 4 10 z loss C Documents and Settings English gt Figure 3 2 Failure result of Ping command Please check the connection following these steps 1 Is the connection between your PC and the Router correct 2 Is the TCP IP configuration for your PC correct 12 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN e AYE Tae Mm o LLO 3 2 Quick Installation Guide With a Web based utility it is easy to configure and manage the TL WR710N 150Mbps Wireless N Mini Pocket Router Advanced Edition The Web based utility can be used on any Windows Macintosh or UNIX OS with a Web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer Mozilla Firefox or Apple Safari 1 To access the configuration utility open a web browser and type in the default address http tplinklogin net in the address field of the browser After a moment a login window will appear similar to the Figure 3 3 Enter admin for the User Name and Password both in lower case letters Then click the OK button or press the Enter key Windows Security The server tplinklogin net at TP LINK 150Mbps Wireles
68. by the application in the UPnP request e External Port The external port the Router opens for the application e Protocol The type of protocol the Router opens for the application e Internal Port The Internal port the Router opens for local host e IP Address The IP address of the UPnP device that is currently accessing the Router 68 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa e Status The status of the port is displayed here Enabled means that the port is still active Otherwise the port is inactive Click Refresh to update the Current UPnP Settings List 4 11 Security Security Advanced Security Local Management Remote Management Figure 4 49 The Security menu There are four submenus under the Security menu as shown in Figure 4 49 Basic Security Advanced Security Local Management and Remote Management Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 4 11 1 Basic Security Choose menu Security Basic Security you can configure the basic security in the screen as shown in Figure 4 50 Basic Security Firewall SPI Firewall Enable Disable VPN PPTP Passthrough Enable Disable L2TP Passthrough Enable O Disable IPSec Passthrough Enable Disable ALG FTP ALG Enable Disable TFTP ALG Enable Disable H323 ALG Enable Disable RTSP ALG Enable Disable Figure 4 50 Basic Security
69. can change the remote management Web interface to a custom port by entering that number in this box provided Choose a number between 1024 and 65535 but do not use the number of any common service port gt Remote Management IP Address This is the current address you will use when accessing your router from the Internet The default IP Address is 0 0 0 0 It means this function is disabled To enable this function change the default IP Address to another IP Address as desired To access the router you will type your router s WAN IP Address into your browser s Address in IE or Location in Navigator box followed by a colon and the custom port number For example if your Router s WAN address is 202 96 12 8 and you use port number 8080 enter in your browser http 202 96 12 8 8080 You will be asked for the router s password After successfully entering the password you will be able to access the router s Web based utility amp Note Be sure to change the router s default password to a very secure password 273 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa 4 12 Parental Control Choose menu Parental Control and you can configure the parental control in the screen as shown in Figure 4 54 The Parental Control function can be used to control the internet activities of the child limit the child to access certain websites and restrict the time of surfing Parental Control Settings Non Parental PCs not l
70. change unless necessary Connection Mode Connect on Demand Max Idle Time 115 minutes 0 means remain active at all times O Connect Automatically O Connect Manually Max Idle Time 115 minutes 0 means remain active at all times Disconnect Disconnected Figure 8 9 WAN BigPond Cable User Name Password Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP These fields are case sensitive Auth Server Enter the authenticating server IP address or host name Auth Domain Type in the domain suffix server name based on your location MTU Size The default MTU size is 1480 bytes which is usually fine It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP Connect on Demand In this mode the Internet connection can be terminated automatically after a specified inactivity period Max Idle Time and be re established when you attempt to access the Internet again If you want your Internet connection keeps active all the time please enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet access disconnects Connect Automatically The connection can be re established automatically when it was down Connect Manually You can click the Connect Disconnect button to connect disconnect immediately This mode also supports the Max Idle Time function as Connect on Demand mode The Internet connection can be
71. configure the IP address for your PC as the following steps 1 Set up the TCP IP Protocol in Obtain an IP address automatically mode on your PC If you need instructions as to how to do this please refer to Appendix B Configuring the PC 2 Then the built in DHCP server will assign IP address for the PC Then connect to the Router through wireless connection following the steps below 1 Click the icon HJ at the bottom of your desktop Click refresh button and then select the default SSID of the Router Click Connect NetworkProfile ho J B19DDE_ZLP al 8877A7 wl 5CD71E wal Infra_KeyTest wt f TP LINK_Networkl atl Y Connect automatically TP LINK_1B0F28 M TPLINK_030407 TP LINK_5CD71E oul AutoTest i Open Network and Sharing Center 10 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN e AYE Tae Mm o Lio 2 Enter the Security key Click OK Type the network security key Security key seeeeeccee 3 If you can see Connected after the default SSID you ve successfully connected to the wireless network oveuvsosveveeeveussusvovsvenscsesseessoveveseesevsussevusseueseussussousesuesseusseseouauecesseusesssoveveneueueauseereey A nd Wireless Network Connection 6 A TP LINK Networkl Connected yl NetworkProfile B19DDE_ZLP 8877A7 a 1B0F28 Infra_KeyTest TP LINK_1B0F28 TP LINK_B19DDE_ZLP Em Bn a a as y TP LINK_8877A7 P Open Network and Sharing Center 10 1
72. devices in your network The default SSID is set to be TP LINK_XXXXXX XXXXXX indicates the last unique six numbers of each Router s MAC address But it is recommended strongly that you change your networks name SSID to a different value This value is case sensitive For example TEST is NOT the same as fest Region Select your region from the pull down list This field specifies the region where the wireless function of the Router can be used It may be illegal to use the wireless function of the Router in a region other than one of those specified in this field If your country or region is not listed please contact your local government agency for assistance Channel This field determines which operating frequency will be used The default channel is set to Auto It is not necessary to change the wireless channel unless you notice interference problems with another nearby access point Mode Select the desired mode The default setting is 11bgn mixed e 11bg mixed Select if you are using both 802 11b and 802 11g wireless clients e 11bgn mixed Select if you are using a mix of 802 11b 11g and 11n wireless clients When 11bg mixed mode is selected only 11bg mixed wireless stations can connect to the Router It is strongly recommended that you set the Mode to 11bgn mixed and all of 802 11b g n wireless stations can connect to the Router 18 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa cf Note If 11bg mixed mod
73. digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 5 ASCII characters 128 bit You can enter 26 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 13 ASCII characters 115 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa 152 bit You can enter 32 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 16 ASCII characters ce Note If you do not set the key the wireless security function is still disabled even if you have selected Shared Key as Authentication Type 5 7 3 Wireless MAC Filtering Choose menu Wireless Wireless MAC Filtering and then you can control the wireless access by configuring the Wireless MAC Filtering function as shown in Figure 5 14 Wireless MAC Filtering Wireless MAC Filtering Enabled Filtering Rules Deny the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access O Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access ID MAC Address Status Description Modify Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure 5 14 Wireless MAC Filtering To filter wireless users by MAC Address click Enabled The default setting is Disabled gt MAC Address The wireless station s MAC address that you want to access gt Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled gt Description A simple description of the wireless station To Add
74. disconnected automatically 197 TL WR710N MENTE IET TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o Lio Ta after a specified inactivity period and re established when you attempt to access the Internet again Click the Connect button to connect immediately Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately Caution Sometimes the connection cannot be terminated although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background Click the Save button to save your settings If your ISP provides L2TP connection please select L2TP Russia L2TP option Then you should enter the following parameters Figure 8 10 WAN Connection Type L2TP Russia L2TP User Name username Password sencnees Disconnect Disconnected Dynamic IP Static IP Server IP AddressiName IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 DNS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Internet IP Address 0 0 0 0 Internet DNS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MTU Size in bytes 1460 The default is 1460 do not change unless necessary Max Idle Time 15 minutes 0 means remain active at all times Connection Mode Connect on Demand Connect Automatically Connect Manually Save Figure 8 10 WAN L2TP Russia L2TP gt User Name Password Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP These fields are case sensitive gt Dynamic IP Stati
75. effective gt Protocol Transport layer protocol here there are All TCP UDP 245 TL WR710N Elo EAA KIE TT Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa gt Egress Bandwidth The max and the min upload speed which through the WAN port default number is 0 gt Ingress Bandwidth The max and the min download speed through the WAN port default number is 0 Step 3 Click the Save button 8 15 IP amp MAC Binding IP amp MAC Binding Figure 8 76 The IP amp MAC Binding menu There are two submenus under the IP amp MAC Binding menu Binding Setting and ARP List Click any of them and you will be able to scan or configure the corresponding function The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below 8 15 1 Binding Setting This page displays the IP amp MAC Binding Setting table you can operate it in accord with your desire Binding Settings ARP Binding Disable Enable ID MAC Address IP Address Bind Modify 1 00 0A EB 00 07 BE 192 168 0 173 Modify Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next CurrentNo 1 v Page Figure 8 77 IP amp MAC Binding Setting gt MAC Address The MAC address of the controlled computer in the LAN gt IP Address The assigned IP address of the controlled computer in the LAN gt Bind Whether or not enable the ARP binding gt Modify Edit or delete item 246 TL WR710N MENTE ET TT e AYE Tae Mm o LLO When
76. every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 5 28 Media Server Setting 2 Click the Start button to start the media server and then the screen will appear as shown in Figure 5 29 Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Started E Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 5 29 Media Server Setting 3 Click the Add share folder button to specify a folder as the search path of media server The screen will then appear as shown in Figure 5 30 126 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o Lio Add New Folder Display Name video Partition C Share entire partition Folder Location imy share Select Folder video Figure 5 30 Add New Folder gt Display Name You can enter a display name for the share folder gt Share entire partition Choose this option and then the folders contained in this partition will all be shared gt Folder Location Displays the location of this folder gt Select Check the radio button to select the folder to share gt Folder Displays folders that are in current path gt Upper Click this button to get into the upper folder gt Save Click this button to save your settings and the page will be redirected to the media server configuration page gt Back Click this button to discard the settings and just g
77. for all Figure 8 49 Remote Management gt Web Management Port Web browser access normally uses the standard HTTP service port 80 This router s default remote management Web port number is 80 For greater security you can change the remote management Web interface to a custom port by entering that number in this box provided Choose a number between 1024 and 65535 but do not use the number of any common service port gt Remote Management IP Address This is the current address you will use when accessing your router from the Internet The default IP Address is 0 0 0 0 It means this function is disabled To enable this function change the default IP Address to another IP Address as desired To access the router you will type your router s WAN IP Address into your browser s Address in IE or Location in Navigator box followed by a colon and the custom port number For example if your Router s WAN address is 202 96 12 8 and you use port number 8080 enter in your browser http 202 96 12 8 8080 You will be asked for the router s password After successfully entering the password you will be able to access the router s Web based utility amp Note Be sure to change the router s default password to a very secure password 230 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa 8 11 Parental Control Choose menu Parental Control and you can configure the parental control in the screen as shown in Fi
78. function as Connect on Demand mode The Internet connection can be disconnected automatically 40 TL WR710N MENTE IET TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o Lio Ta after a specified inactivity period and re established when you attempt to access the Internet again Click the Connect button to connect immediately Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately Caution Sometimes the connection cannot be terminated although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background Click the Save button to save your settings If your ISP provides L2TP connection please select L2TP Russia L2TP option Then you should enter the following parameters Figure 4 14 WAN Connection Type L2TP Russia L2TP User Name username Password sencnees Disconnect Disconnected Dynamic IP Static IP Server IP AddressiName IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 DNS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Internet IP Address 0 0 0 0 Internet DNS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MTU Size in bytes 1460 The default is 1460 do not change unless necessary Max Idle Time 15 minutes 0 means remain active at all times Connection Mode Connect on Demand Connect Automatically Connect Manually Save Figure 4 14 WAN L2TP Russia L2TP gt User Name Password Enter the User Name and Password provided by
79. green for five minutes if the device has been successfully added to the network 2 The WPS function cannot be configured if the Wireless function of the AP is disabled Please make sure the Wireless function is enabled before configuring the WPS 109 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN e AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa 5 5 Working Mode The Router supports five operation mode types Wireless Router Access Point Repeater Client and Wireless Client Router Please select one you want Click Save to save your choice which is shown as Figure 5 7 Working Mode O Wireless Router Enable multiple users to share Internet connection via ADSLUCable Modem Access Point Transform your existing wired network to a wireless network Repeater Extend your existing wireless coverage by relaying wireless signal Client Acting as a Wireless Adapter to connect your wired devices e g XbowPS3 to a wireless network WISP Client Router Enable multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP Figure 5 7 Wireless Working Mode Settings gt Wireless Router The wireless Router Mode In this mode the device enables multi user to share Internet via DSL Cable Modem The only wired port works as WAN gt Access Point The wireless access point mode gt Repeater The wireless Repeater Mode It could extend the range of wireless network gt Client The Client Mode The computer connected by Ethernet could get access to an AP b
80. gt DNS Server The DNS Domain Name System server IP addresses currently used by the Router gt Traffic Statistics The Router s traffic statistics e Received Bytes Traffic that counted in bytes has been received out from the WAN port e Received Packets Traffic that counted in packets has been received out from the WAN port e Sent Bytes Traffic that counted in bytes has been sent out from the WAN port e Sent Packets Traffic that counted in packets has been sent out from the WAN port gt System Up Time The length of the time since the Router was last powered on or reset Click the Refresh button to get the latest status and settings of the Router 29 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa 4 3 Quick Setup Please refer to Section 3 2 Quick Installation Guide 4 4 WPS WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup can help you to quickly and securely connect to a network This section will guide you to add a new wireless device to an existing network quickly by function The WPS function is only available when the Operation Mode is set to Access Point Select menu WPS you will see the next screen shown in Figure 4 3 WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup WPSStatus Enabled Disable WPS Current PIN 12345670 Restore PIN Gen New PIN O Disable PIN of this Device Add A New Device Add Device Figure 4 3 WPS gt WPS Status To enable or disable the WPS function here gt Current PIN
81. gt Wireless gt gt Finish Congratulations This device is now connecting you to the Internet For detail settings please click other menus if necessary Back Reboot Figure 3 10 Quick Setup Finish 3 2 2 Access Point Mode When you choose Access Point on Working Mode page in Figure 3 5 take the following steps 1 Click Next in Figure 3 5 and then Wireless page will appear as shown in Figure 3 11 17 TL WR710N Quick Setup Wireless 150Mbps Wireless N Mini Pocket Router Advanced Edition Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt Vvireless gt gt Finish AP Mode Setting Wireless Network Name SSID TP LINK_2046F2 also called SSID Region United States v Warning Ensure you select a correct country to conform local law ncorrect settings may cause interference Channel Auto Mode 11bgn mixed v Channel Width Auto v Wireless Security Mode Most Secure WPAWPA2 PSK Wireless Password 1234567890 You can enter ASCII or Hexadecimal characters For Hexadecimal the length should be b een 8 and 64 characters for ASCII the length should be between 8 and 63 characters For good security it should be of ample length and should not be a commonly kr own pharse Back Next Figure 3 11 Quick Setup Wireless Wireless Network Name Enter a string of up to 32 characters The same name of SSID Service Set Identification must be assigned to all wireless
82. it default if you are not sure minimum is 30 0 means no update We do not recommend using the TKIP encryption ifthis device operates in 802 11n mode due to the fact that TKIP is not supported by 802 11n specification Figure 6 10 WPA WPA2 Enterprise It s based on Radius Server e Version you can choose the version of the WPA security from the pull down list The default setting is Automatic which can select WPA Wi Fi Protected Access or WPA2 WPA version 2 automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e Encryption You can select Automatic TKIP or AES e Radius Server IP Enter the IP address of the Radius server Radius Port Enter the port that Radius server used e Radius Password Enter the password for the Radius server e Group Key Update Period Specify the group key update interval in seconds The value should be 30 or above Enter 0 to disable the update WEP It is based on the IEEE 802 11 standard e Type you can choose the type for the WEP security on the pull down list The default setting is Automatic which can select Shared Key or Open System authentication type automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e WEP Key Format Hexadecimal and ASCII formats are provided here Hexadecimal format stands for any combination of hexadecimal digits 0 9 a f A F in the specified length ASCII format stands for any combination of keyboard characters i
83. left of your browser and click DMZ submenu On the DMZ page click Enable radio button and type your IP address into the DMZ Host IP Address field using 192 168 0 169 as an example remember to click the Save button Current DMZ Status Enable Disable DMZ Host IP Address 192 168 0 169 Save Figure A 6 DMZ 4 want to build a WEB Server on the LAN what should I do 1 Because the WEB Server port 80 will interfere with the WEB management port 80 on the Router you must change the WEB management port number to avoid interference 262 2 TL WR710N 150Mbps Wireless N Mini Pocket Router Advanced Edition To change the WEB management port number Log in to the Router click the Security menu on the left of your browser and click Remote Management submenu On the Remote Management page type a port number except 80 such as 88 into the Web Management Port field Click Save and reboot the Router Web Management Port Remote Management IP Address Remote Management 0 0 0 0 Enter 255 255 255 255 for all amp amp Note Figure A 7 Remote Management If the above configuration takes effect configure to the Router by typing 192 168 0 188 the Router s LAN IP address Web Management Port in the address field of the Web browser 3 Log in to the Router click the Forwarding menu on the left of your browser and click
84. more recent firmware upgrade file from the TP LINK website http www tp link com Type the path and file name of the update file into the File field or click the Browse button to locate the update file Click the Upgrade button Note New firmware versions are posted at http www tp link com and can be downloaded for free There is no need to upgrade the firmware unless the new firmware has a new feature you want to use However when experiencing problems caused by the Router rather than the configuration you can try to upgrade the firmware When you upgrade the Router s firmware you may lose its current configurations so before upgrading the firmware please write down some of your customized settings to avoid losing important settings Do not turn off the Router or press the Reset button while the firmware is being upgraded otherwise the Router may be damaged The Router will reboot after the upgrading has been finished 6 9 3 Factory Defaults Choose menu System Tools Factory Defaults and you can restore the configurations of the Router to factory defaults on the following screen 160 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN e AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa Factory Defaults Click the following button to reset all configuration settings to their default values Figure 6 34 Restore Factory Default Click the Restore button to reset all configuration settings to their default values gt The default User Name
85. page Add a new entry with the Host Description is Host_1 and MAC Address is 00 11 22 33 44 AA Click Access Restriction Target in the left to enter the Target Settings page Add a new entry with the Target Description is Target_1 and Domain Name is www google com Click Access Restriction Schedule in the left to enter the Schedule Settings page Add a new entry with the Schedule Description is Schedule _1 Day is Sat and Sun Start Time is 1800 and Stop Time is 2000 Click Access Restriction Rule in the left to return to the Access Restriction Rule Management page Select Enable Internet Access Restriction and choose Deny the packets not specified by any access Restriction policy to pass through the Router Click Add New button to add a new rule as follows 235 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN e E Tare Mm o LL ioa e In Rule Name field create a name for the rule Note that this name should be unique for example Rule_1 e In Host field select Host_1 e In Target field select Target_1 e In Schedule field select Schedule _1 e In Action field select Allow e In Status field select Enabled e Click Save to complete the settings Then you will go back to the Access Restriction Rule Management page and see the following list ID Rule Name Host Target Schedule Status Modify 1 Rule_1 Host 1 Target 1 Schedule 1 Edit Delete setup Wizard Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All
86. page or click the Previous button return to the previous page Add or Modify an Access Target Entry Mode IP Address Y Target Description IP Address Target Port gt Protocol All v Common Service Port Please Select Y Figure 8 62 Add or Modify an Access Target Entry Add or Modify an Access Target Entry Mode Domain Name Target Description Domain Name Figure 8 63 Add or Modify an Access Target Entry For example If you desire to restrict the internet activities of host with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 AA in the LAN to access www google com only you should first follow the settings below 1 Click Add New button in Figure 8 61 to enter the Add or Modify an Access Target Entry page In Mode field select Domain Name from the drop down list In Target Description field create a unique description for the target e g Target_1 In Domain Name field enter www google com a FF oN Click Save to complete the settings 239 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o Lio Then you will go back to the Target Settings page and see the following list Target Settings ID Target Description Information Modify 1 Target_1 www google com Edit Delete Add New Delete All Previous Next Current No 1 Page Figure 8 64 Target Settings 8 12 4 Schedule Choose menu Access Co
87. please choose this type If you choose this type of connection no configuration should be set and you can go on with the wireless configuration in Figure 3 9 gt Static IP This type of connection uses a permanent fixed static IP address that your ISP assigned In this type you should fill in the IP address Subnet Mask Default Gateway and DNS IP address manually which are specified by your ISP Then click Next and proceed to Figure 3 9 Quick Setup Static IP Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt WAN Connection Type gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 Optional Next Figure 3 8 Quick Setup Static IP 15 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve E Tare Mm o Lio 2 Then the Wireless page will appear as shown in Figure 3 9 Set the wireless parameters It is recommended that you rename an SSID choose a Security Type and enter a Password Then click Next Quick Setup Wireless Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt WAN Connection Type gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish Wireless Radio Enable Wireless Network Name TP LINK_2045F2 Also called the SSID Region United States v Warning Ensure you select a correct country to conform local law Incorrect settings may cause interference Mode 11bgn mixed si Channel Width Auto Channel auto
88. provides the TCP IP configuration for all the PC s that are connected to the Router in the LAN DHCP Server Disable Enable Start IP Address 192 168 0 100 End IP Address 192 168 0 199 Address Lease Time 120 minutes 1 2880 minutes the default value is 120 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 optional Default Domain optional Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 optional Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 optional Figure 5 19 DHCP Settings gt DHCP Server Enable or Disable the DHCP server If you disable the Server you must have another DHCP server within your network or else you must configure the computer manually 120 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa gt Start IP Address Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to start with when assigning IP addresses 192 168 0 100 is the default start address gt End IP Address Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to end with when assigning IP addresses 192 168 0 199 is the default end address gt Address Lease Time The Address Lease Time is the amount of time a network user will be allowed connection to the Router with their current dynamic IP Address Enter the amount of time in minutes and the user will be leased this dynamic IP Address After the time is up the user will be automatically assigned a new dynamic IP address The range of the time is 1 2880 minutes The default value is 120 minutes gt Defau
89. s based on Radius Server Version you can choose the version of the WPA security from the pull down list The default setting is Automatic which can select WPA Wi Fi Protected Access or WPA2 WPA version 2 automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request Encryption You can select Automatic TKIP or AES Radius Server IP Enter the IP address of the Radius server Radius Port Enter the port that Radius server used Radius Password Enter the password for the Radius server Group Key Update Period Specify the group key update interval in seconds The value should be 30 or above Enter 0 to disable the update WEP It is based on the IEEE 802 11 standard Type you can choose the type for the WEP security on the pull down list The default setting is Automatic which can select Shared Key or Open System authentication type automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request WEP Key Format Hexadecimal and ASCII formats are provided here Hexadecimal format stands for any combination of hexadecimal digits 0 9 a f A F in the specified length ASCII format stands for any combination of keyboard characters in the specified length WEP Key Password Select which of the four keys will be used and enter the matching WEP key that you create Make sure these values are identical on all wireless stations in your network Key Type You can select the WEP key length 64 bit or 128 bit
90. the Connect Disconnect button to connect disconnect immediately This mode also supports the Max Idle Time function as Connect on Demand mode The Internet connection can be disconnected automatically after a specified inactivity period and re established when you attempt to access the Internet again Click the Connect button to connect immediately Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately Caution Sometimes the connection cannot be terminated although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background If you want to do some advanced configurations please click the Advanced button and the page shown in Figure 8 8 will then appear 195 TL WR710N MENITER MIE TN e E Tale Mm o LL ioa PPPoE Advanced Settings MTU Size in bytes 1480 The default is 1480 do not change unless necessary Service Name AC Name C Use IP Address Specified by ISP ISP Specified IP Address 0 0 0 0 Detect Online Interval 0 Seconds 0 120 seconds the default is 0 0 means not detecting O Use The Following DNS Servers Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 Optional Save Back Figure 8 8 PPPoE Advanced Settings gt MTU Size The default MTU size is 1480 bytes which is usually fine It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP gt Se
91. the Password field 4 Choose the Storage Authority from the drop down list Read and Write or Read Only Add or Modify User Account User Name admin2 Password admin Storage Authority Read and Write v Figure 5 32 Add or Modify User Account gt User Name Type the user name that you want to give access to the USB drive The user name must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length gt Password Enter the password in the Password field The password must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length For security purposes the password for each user account is not displayed 128 TL WR710N MENTE IE LT e Re Tare Mm o LL ioa gt Storage Authority Choose Read and Write or Read Only from the drop down list to assign access authority of Storage Sharing to the user gt Save You can click the Save button to save your settings gt Back You can click the Back button to discard the settings and just go to the media server configuration page EP Note Please restart the service for the new settings to take effect If you cannot use the new user name and password to access the shares press Windows logo R to open the Run dialog box and type net use 192 168 0 254 delete yes and press Enter 192 168 0 254 is your router s LAN IP address If the LAN IP of the modem connected with your router is 192 168 1 x the defau
92. the Router on during the upgrading process to prevent any damage 7 9 5 Reboot Choose menu System Tools Reboot and then you can click the Reboot button to reboot the Router via the next screen Click this button to reboot this device Figure 7 31 Reboot the Router Some settings of the Router will take effect only after rebooting which include Vv Vv VW Y VY vv Change the LAN IP Address system will reboot automatically Change the DHCP Settings Change the Wireless configurations Change the Web Management Port Upgrade the firmware of the Router system will reboot automatically Restore the Router s settings to factory defaults system will reboot automatically Update the configuration with the file system will reboot automatically 185 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN e AYE Tale Mm o Lio 7 9 6 Password Choose menu System Tools Password and then you can change the factory default user name and password of the Router in the next screen as shown in Figure 7 32 The username and password must not exceed 14 characters in length and must not include any spaces Old User Name Old Password New User Name New Password Confirm New Password Figure 7 32 Password It is strongly recommended that you should change the factory default user name and password of the Router because all users who try to access the Router s Web based utility or Quick
93. the local host using one of the ports defined in the Incoming Ports field Trigger Port The port for outgoing traffic An outgoing connection using this port will trigger this rule Trigger Protocol The protocol used for Trigger Ports either TCP UDP or All all protocols supported by the Router Incoming Ports The port or port range used by the remote system when it responds to the outgoing request A response using one of these ports will be forwarded to the PC that triggered this rule You can input at most 5 groups of ports or port sections Every group of ports must be set apart with For example 2000 2038 2050 2051 2085 3010 3030 Incoming Protocol The protocol used for Incoming Ports Range either TCP or UDP or ALL all protocols supported by the Router Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To add a new rule follow the steps below 1 2 Click the Add New button the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 4 46 Select a common application from the Common Applications drop down list then the Trigger Port field and the Incoming Ports field will be automatically filled If the Common Applications do not have the application you need enter the Trigger Port and the Incoming Ports manually Select the protocol used for Trigger Port from the Trigger Protocol drop down list either TCP UDP or All 66 TL WR710N MENTE
94. the radio button to select the folder to share gt Folder Displays folders that are in current path gt Upper Click this button to get into the upper folder gt Save Click this button to save your settings and the page will be redirected to the media server configuration page gt Back Click this button to discard the settings and just go to the media server configuration page 155 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa 4 Click the Scan All button to scan all the share folders immediately You can also select the Auto scan at same time select an auto scan interval time by drop down list In this case the media server will auto scan the share folders E Note The max share folders number is 6 If you want share a new folder when the number has been reached to be 6 you can delete a share folder and then add a new one 6 8 3 User Accounts You can specify the user name and password for Storage Sharing users on this page Storage Sharing users can use Internet Explorer to access files on the USB drive There are two default user accounts that can access the Storage Sharing They are Administrator and Guest as shown in Figure 6 28 Administrator has read write access to Storage Sharing while Guest has read only access to Storage Sharing User Account Management Add New User User Name Password Storage Authority Modify admin admin Read and Write yes Edit guest guest Read Only no Edit
95. to 20 00 on Saturday and For example If you desire to restrict the internet activities of host with Sunday you should first follow the settings below 1 Click Add New button shown in Figure 4 69 to enter the Advanced Schedule Settings page 2 In Schedule Description field create a unique description for the schedule e g Schedule_1 3 In Day field check the Select Days radio button and then select Sat and Sun 4 In Time field enter 1800 in Start Time field and 2000 in Stop Time field 5 Click Save to complete the settings Then you will go back to the Schedule Settings page and see the following list Schedule Settings ID Schedule Description Day Time Modify 1 Schedule_1 Sat Sun 18 00 20 00 Edit Delete Add New Delete All Prevoius Next Current No 1 w Page Figure 4 71 Schedule Settings 84 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN e AYE Tae Mm o Lio 4 14 Advanced Routing Advanced Routing System Routing Table Figure 4 72 The Advanced Routing Menu There are two submenus under the Network menu shown in Figure 4 72 Static Routing List and System Routing Table Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 4 14 1 Static Routing List Choose menu Static Routing and you can configure the static route in the next screen shown in Figure 4 73 A static route is a pre determined path that network information must travel to reach a specific host or ne
96. to 32 characters The same name of SSID Service Set Identification must be assigned to all wireless devices in your network The default SSID is set to be TP LINK_XXXXXX XXXXXX indicates the last unique six numbers of each Router s MAC address But it is recommended strongly that you change your networks name SSID to a different value This value is case sensitive For example TEST is NOT the same as fest gt Region Select your region from the pull down list This field specifies the region where the wireless function of the Router can be used It may be illegal to use the wireless function of the Router in a region other than one of those specified in this field If your country or region is not listed please contact your local government agency for assistance gt Channel This field determines which operating frequency will be used The default channel is set to Auto lt is not necessary to change the wireless channel unless you notice interference problems with another nearby access point gt Mode Select the desired mode The default setting is 11bgn mixed e 11bg mixed Select if you are using both 802 11b and 802 11g wireless clients e 11bgn mixed Select if you are using a mix of 802 11b 11g and 11n wireless clients 112 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa When 11bg mixed mode is selected only 11bg mixed wireless stations can connect to the Router It is strongly recommended that you set
97. w Wireless Security O Disable Security WPA PSK WPA2 PSK PSK Password 1234567890 You can enter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters between 8 and 64 O No Change Back Next Figure 3 9 Quick Setup Wireless gt Wireless Radio Enable or disable the wireless radio choosing from the pull down list gt Wireless Network Name Enter a string of up to 32 characters The same name of SSID Service Set Identification must be assigned to all wireless devices in your network The default SSID is set to be TP LINK_XXXXXX XXXXXX indicates the last unique six numbers of each Router s MAC address But it is recommended strongly that you change your networks name SSID to a different value This value is case sensitive For example TEST is NOT the same as fest gt Region Select your region from the pull down list This field specifies the region where the wireless function of the Router can be used It may be illegal to use the wireless function of the Router in a region other than one of those specified in this field If your country or region is not listed please contact your local government agency for assistance gt Mode Select the desired mode The default setting is 11bgn mixed e 11bg mixed Select if you are using both 802 11b and 802 11g wireless clients e 11bgn mixed Select if you are using a mix of 802 11b 11g and 11n wireless clients 16 TL WR710N MENTE E
98. 00 The default value is 50 Enter a value between 5 3600 When the current TCP SYN FLOOD Packets numbers is beyond the set value the Router will startup the blocking function immediately gt Ignore Ping Packet From WAN Port Enable or Disable Ignore Ping Packet From WAN Port The default setting is disabled If enabled the ping packet from the Internet cannot access the Router gt Forbid Ping Packet From LAN Port Enable or Disable Forbid Ping Packet From LAN Port The default setting is disabled If enabled the ping packet from LAN cannot access the Router This function can be used to defend against some viruses Click the Save button to save the settings Click the Blocked DoS Host List button to display the DoS host table by blocking 4 11 3 Local Management Choose menu Security Local Management you can configure the management rule in the screen as shown in Figure 4 52 The management feature allows you to deny computers in LAN from accessing the Router Local Management Management Rules All the PCs on the LAN are allowed to access the Router s Web Based Utility Only the PCs listed can browse the built in web pages to perform Administrator tasks MAC 1 MAC 2 MAC 3 MAC 4 Your PC s MAC Address 6C 62 6D F 31 81 Add Figure 4 52 Local Management By default the radio button All the PCs on the LAN are allowed to access the Router s Web Based U
99. 08 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 3 Approximate round trip times in milliseconds Minimum 1 Maximum 1 Average 1 Figure 5 35 Diagnostic Results GP Note Only one user can use this tool at one time Options Number of Pings Ping Size and Ping Timeout are used for Ping function Option Tracert Hops are used for Tracert function 5 10 2 Firmware Upgrade Choose menu System Tools Firmware Upgrade and then you can update the latest version of firmware for the Router on the following screen pe Crowes Firmware Version 3 14 4 Build 130128 Rel 36510n Hardware Version WR710N v1 00000000 Figure 5 36 Firmware Upgrade gt Firmware Version This displays the current firmware version gt Hardware Version This displays the current hardware version The hardware version of the upgrade file must accord with the Router s current hardware version To upgrade the Router s firmware follow these instructions below 1 Download a more recent firmware upgrade file from the TP LINK website http www tp link com 2 Type the path and file name of the update file into the File field or click the Browse button to locate the update file 3 Click the Upgrade button 131 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa ce Note 1 New firmware versions are posted at http www tp link com and can be downloaded for free There is no need to upgr
100. 2 AM 3 29 2011 EN A Pz ct 1 c Note 1 The default SSID and Password of your Router are on the label Both are case sensitive 2 The pre encryption function is enabled by default and the default Network key Security key is the Password on the label Now you can run the Ping command in the command prompt to verify the network connection between your PC and the Router The following example is in Windows XP Open a command prompt and type ping 192 168 0 254 and then press Enter gt Ifthe result displayed is similar to the Figure 3 1 it means the connection between your PC and the Router has been established well 11 TL WR710N OMbps Wireless N Mini Pocket Router Advanced Edition B x Microsoft Windows XP Version 5 1 2666 lt C gt Copyright 1985 2661 Microsoft Corp C Documents and Settings English gt Ping 192 168 6 254 Pinging 192 168 6 254 with 32 bytes of data 192 168 254 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 64 192 168 6 254 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 64 192 168 8 254 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 64 Reply from 192 168 0 254 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 64 Ping statistics for 192 168 254 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost z loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum ms Maximum Bms Average ms C Documents and Settings English gt _ Figure 3 1 Success result of Ping command gt Ifthe result displayed is similar to the Figure 3 2 it means the connection
101. 5 0 or later Mozilla Firefox Apple Safari If the device is configured to Wireless Router Access Point mode you also need Broadband Internet Access Service DSL Cable Ethernet One DSL Cable Modem that has an RJ45 connector which is not necessary if the Router is connected directly to the Ethernet 2 2 Installation Environment Requirements Place the Router in a well ventilated place far from any heater or heating vent Place the Router in a location where it can be connected to the various devices as well as to a power source Avoid direct irradiation of any strong light such as sunlight Keep at least 2 inches 5 cm of clear space around the Router Operating Temperature 0 C 40 C 32 F 104 F Operating Humidity 10 90 RH Non condensing 2 3 Connecting the Router Before installing the Router please make sure your broadband service provided by your ISP is available If there is any problem please contact with your ISP To connect the Router please follow the steps below 1 2 3 Power off your PC Cable DSL Modem and the Router Locate an optimum location for the Router The best place is usually at the center of your wireless network The place must accord with the Installation Environment Requirements Plug the power plug in the electrical wall socket The Router will start to work automatically After finishing the steps above please choose the operation mode you need and carry out the correspo
102. A A A A K MADERA Jn iat ZEEE BO HE y at EFU ARR EE AE PATA PAST RCRA TL E IES ETERN UN AE DA RES AA ATAR PEA A NS PE EZ TIE o WP ERE MARE KAA RTE SAE REI JAA E IR EE A AE PE YE ELLE ASE h o o gt gt RAE LA UR RT MESA RAE S OLER INR AAA We BU AS mE o Or PORE DUE DR AS aE m ERE SPE IE GZ CAE BA a Bed H o OAK A E ABORT RAPA ERIE PRU AN CE 8 PA OK EMA TTDI MEER AT AME A cE in oe BORER Ste A HE TUITE E MpogyktT ceptucpikoBaHo 3rigHo c npaBunamnu cncremn YKpCEMPO Ha BianoBiaHicre BuMoram HOPMaTUBHNX DOKYMEHT B Ta BNMOTAM WO nepeg5ayeni yMHHNMN 3aKOHOAABYUMU akTamu YkpaiHn HL Safety Information When product has power button the power button is one of the way to shut off the product when there is no power button the only way to completely shut off power is to disconnect the product or the power adapter from the power source Don t disassemble the product or make repairs yourself You run the risk of electric shock and voiding the limited warranty If you ne
103. A TN Ve E Tale Mm o LL ioa gt Storage Authority Choose Read and Write or Read Only from the drop down list to assign access authority of Storage Sharing to the user gt Save You can click the Save button to save your settings gt Back You can click the Back button to discard the settings and just go to the media server configuration page E Note Please restart the service for the new settings to take effect If you cannot use the new user name and password to access the shares press Windows logo R to open the Run dialog box and type net use 192 168 0 254 delete yes and press Enter 192 168 0 254 is your router s LAN IP address If the LAN IP of the modem connected with your router is 192 168 1 x the default LAN IP of the router will automatically switch from 192 168 0 254 to 192 168 1 254 to avoid IP conflict in this case please try net use 192 168 1 254 delete yes 7 9 System Tools System Tools Firmware Upgrade Factory Defaults Backup amp Restore Reboot Password System Log Figure 7 25 The System Tools menu Choose menu System Tools and then you can see the submenus under the main menu Diagnostic Firmware Upgrade Factory Defaults Backup 8 Restore Reboot Password and System Log Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below 7 9 1 Diagnostic Choose menu
104. Access Point you want to access and click Connect in the corresponding row For example the third item is selected The target network s SSID will be automatically filled into the corresponding box which is shown as the Figure 3 14 AP List AP Count 16 COCO COS CTI CTC CTA CT 2 94 0C 60 2F 3C BE P LINK_Network 4748 PAZPSK C Connect D E feccevesarca frommes iow po penare femmes Figure 3 15 AP List Note If you know the SSID of the desired AP you can also input it into the field SSID manually 3 Click the Next button in Figure 3 14 You will then see the Finish page Because something has changed on the Wireless Repeater page you will see the Finish page as shown in Figure 3 16 Click the Reboot button to make your wireless configuration take effect and finish the Quick Setup Quick Setup Finish Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish Congratulations This device is now connecting you to the Internet For detail settings please click other menus if necessary Figure 3 16 Quick Setup Finish 3 2 4 Client Mode When you choose Client on Working Mode page in Figure 3 5 take the following steps 1 Click Next in Figure 3 5 and then Wireless Client page will appear as shown in Figure 3 17 21 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tare B o LL ioa Quick Setup Wireless Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt ireless gt gt Finish Client Mode
105. All button to delete all entries Click the Next button to go to the next page Click the Previous button to return to the previous page For example If you desire that the wireless station A with MAC address 00 0A EB BO 00 0B and the wireless station B with MAC address 00 0A EB 00 07 5F are able to access the Router but all the other wireless stations cannot access the Router you can configure the Wireless MAC Address Filtering list by following these steps 1 Click the Enable button to enable this function 2 Select the radio button Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the list to access for Filtering Rules 3 Delete all or disable all entries if there are any entries already 4 Click the Add New button 1 Enter the MAC address 00 0A EB B0 00 0B 00 0A EB 00 07 5F in the MAC Address field N Enter wireless station A B in the Description field Aa 0 Click the Save button Select Enabled in the Status pull down list Click the Back button 5 The filtering rules that configured should be similar to the following list 209 TL WR710N MENDIETA LT Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa Filtering Rules Deny the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access ID MAC Address Status Description Modify 1 00 0A EB B0 00 0B Enabled wireless station A Modify Delete 2 00 0A EB 00 07 5F Enable
106. CII characters 128 bit You can enter 26 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 13 ASCII characters 152 bit You can enter 32 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 16 ASCII characters tf Note If you do not set the key the wireless security function is still disabled even if you have selected Shared Key as Authentication Type 205 TL WR710N RENTES TN Ve AY Tae Mm o LL ioa 8 6 2 Wireless Security Wireless Security O Disable Security WPAMPA2 Personal Recommended Version Automatic Rezommerdedi Encryption Automatic Rezommerdedi v Wireless Password Ycu can erter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters beween 8 and 64 Group Key Update Period 0 Seconds Kees it cefatit if you re nat sure minimurr is 30 0 mens ro update O WPA WPAZ2 Enterprise Version Automatic Y Encryption Automatic s Radius Server IP Radius Port 1812 1 65535 0 stands for cefait port 1 12 Radius Password Group Key Update Period lo in second minimum is 30 0 means no Jpdate O WEP Type Autorratic x WEP Key Format Hexadecimal y Key Selected WEP Key Key Type Key 1 Disabled Key 2 Disabled xij Key 3 Disabled Y Key 4 Disabled Y Figure 8 17 Wireless Security gt Disable Security The
107. Control Settings page and see the following list as shown in Figure 4 56 ID MAC address Website Description Schedule Status Modify 1 00 11 22 33 44 BB Allow Google Schedule_1 Edit Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All previous Next Current No 1 v Page Figure 4 56 4 13 Access Control Access Control Schedule Figure 4 57 The Access Control menu There are four submenus under the Access Restriction menu as shown in Figure 4 57 Rule Host Target and Schedule Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 4 13 1 Rule Choose menu Access Control Rule you can view and set Access Restriction rules in the screen as shown in Figure 4 58 76 Vv Vv VV WV gt TL WR710N MENTE Tie tte Man TN Ve AY Tare B o LL ioa Access Control Rule Management C Enable Internet Access Control Default Filter Policy Allow the packets specified by any enabled access control policy to pass through the Router Deny the packets specified by any enabled access control policy to pass through the Router Save ID Rule Name Host Target Schedule Status Modify Setup Wizard Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All jroo Previous Next Current No 11 y Page Figure 4 58 Access Control Rule Management Enable Internet Access Control Select the check box to enable the Internet Access Restriction function so the Default Filter Po
108. E ea eds A E egies 35 ABA WANG ister dt tE ae eon ee 35 4 6 2 MAC Clone cut rr A date fe ree ees 44 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 46 37 LAN ca A A ai 45 MMS A li 46 4 7 1 Wireless Settings tado 46 4 1 2 Nireless SeU lt a 48 4 7 3 Wireless MAC FllterInd lt ai dada 51 4TA Wireless Advanced cicle 53 AT Wireless StatiStiCs cian da 54 DAG Ria A Ed A LD das 55 48 1 DHCP SONS iii ede a a a eee 55 4 8 2 DACP Client List ict A ne 56 4 9 3 Address RESCMVALIOM fist stccices teectzast A AEEA AREENA 57 USBiS tingS tico taa AAE 58 4 9 Storage Shara ida 58 4 9 2 Media Seier cueca dit data da 60 4 93 User Accounts asociada ltda dos 62 Forsa ding int AA Add 63 410 1 Virtual SNE a E E EE EA AE EER 64 4 10 2 Port TAJGO crit EE aR EE E AOA OEE E ER 65 410 3 IDMZ vetesceacy ae ean el Nae esi il E et ee AEREE 67 4 10 4 UPAP aineet ee aster na ee ene ete eed 68 a NE A E TAA EE R 69 ATT Basie Secu aeeti italia AE 69 4 11 2 Advanced SECU eun E A laci n es 70 ATES Local Manageme aeres sa di di 72 4 11 4 Remote ManageMent occcinccccnnnoccccnononcccnononn cnn cnn nn cnn nan n cnn narrar 73 Parental Control ecuacion E AEA 74 ACCESS COMO e a a at ends 76 AAA RU A a beat nuns aes 76 4 13 2 HOSt wetted nee tee lee oo nee a ed ee 79 SE A NA A EEA AE N AEN 81 4 134 A A ih 83 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 Chapter 5 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 Advanced ROUINO ai A EEEE OEA Shean aa e
109. ID of the AP Channel The current wireless channel in use e Mode The current wireless mode which the Router works on Channel Width The current wireless channel width in use e MAC Address The physical address of the Router as seen from the WLAN e Client Status The status of Client WAN This field displays the current settings or information for the WAN you can configure them in the Network gt WAN page e MAC Address The physical address of the WAN port as seen from the Internet e IP Address The current WAN Internet IP Address This field will be blank or 0 0 0 0 if the IP Address is assigned dynamically and there is no connection to the Internet e Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with the WAN IP Address Default Gateway The Gateway currently used by the Router is shown here When you use Dynamic IP as the connection Internet type the Renew button will be displayed here Click the Renew Button to obtain new IP parameters dynamically from the ISP And if you have got an IP address Release button will be displayed here Click the Release button to release the IP address the Router has obtained from the ISP e DNS Server The DNS Domain Name System server IP addresses currently used by the Router e Online Time The time that you online When you use PPPoE as WAN connection type the online time is displayed here Click the Connect or Disconnect button to connect to or disconnect from Internet
110. IE TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa 4 Select the protocol used for Incoming Ports from the Incoming Protocol drop down list either TCP or UDP or All 5 Select Enabled in Status field 6 Click the Save button to save the new rule Add or Modify a Port Triggering Entry Trigger Port Trigger Protocol All Incoming Ports Incoming Protocol All Y Status Enabled Common Applications Select One Y Figure 4 46 Add or Modify a Port Triggering Entry To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify the information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled Click the Disable All button to make all entries disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries E Note 1 When the trigger connection is released the corresponding opening ports will be closed 2 Each rule is allowed to be used only by one host on LAN synchronously The trigger connection of other hosts on LAN will be refused 3 Incoming Port Range cannot overlap each other 4 10 3 DMZ Choose menu Forwarding DMZ and then you can view and configure DMZ host in the screen as shown in Figure 4 47 The DMZ host feature allows one local host to be exposed to the Internet for a special purpose service such as Internet gaming or videoconferencing DMZ host
111. Mode WISP Client Router Wireless Radio Enable Name SSID TP LINK_2046F2 Channel 4 Mode 11bgn mixed Channel Width Automatic MAC Address D00 1D 0F 01 06 28 Client Status Run WAN MAC Address D0 1D 0F 01 06 29 IP Address 0 0 0 0 PPPoE Connect Automatically Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 DNS Server 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Online Time 0 day s 00 00 00 Connecting Secondary Connection IP Address 0 0 0 0 Dynamic IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Traffic Statistics Received Sent Bytes 0 0 Packets 0 0 System Up Time D days 00 02 38 Figure 8 2 Status Firmware Version The version information of the Router s firmware Hardware Version The version information of the Router s hardware LAN This field displays the current settings or information for the LAN you can configure them in the Network gt LAN page 189 TL WR710N BRO To eee ge ta TT ood k a a Cole C2 E TL To Mm Lo 14 Tola e MAC Address The physical address of the Router as seen from the LAN e IP Address The LAN IP address of the Router e Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with LAN IP address Wireless This field displays basic information or status for wireless function you can configure them in the Wireless gt Wireless Settings page e Working Mode The current wireless working mode in use Wireless Radio Indicates whether the wireless radio feature of the AP is enabled or disabled Name SSID The SS
112. Month Day Year format 1 2 3 Enter the Time in Hour Minute Second format 4 Click Save For automatic time synchronization 1 Enter the address of the NTP Server 1 or NTP Server 2 2 Click the Get GMT button to get GMT time from Internet if you have connected to Internet GP Note This setting will be used for some time based functions such as firewall You must specify your time zone once you login to the router successfully if not the time limited on these functions will not take effect gt The time will be lost if the router is turned off 95 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AY Tale Mm o LL ioa gt The router will obtain GMT automatically from Internet if it has already connected to Internet 4 18 2 Diagnostic Choose menu System Tools Diagnostic you can transact Ping or Traceroute function to check connectivity of your network in the following screen Diagnostic Tools Diagnostic Parameters Diagnostic Tool O Ping Traceroute IP Address Domain Name Ping Count 4 1 50 Ping Packet Size 64 4 1472 Bytes Ping Timeout leno 100 2000 Milliseconds Traceroute Max TTL 20 1 30 Diagnostic Results This device is ready Figure 4 90 Diagnostic Tools gt Diagnostic Tool Check the radio button to select one diagnostic too e Ping This diagnostic tool troubleshoots connectivity reachability and name resolution to a given host or gateway e Tracerout
113. OC 46 16 Previous Next Figure 4 27 Wireless Statistics gt MAC Address The connected wireless station s MAC address gt Current Status The connected wireless station s running status one of STA AUTH STA ASSOC STA JOINED WPA WPA PSK WPA2 WPA2 PSK AP UP AP DOWN Disconnected gt Received Packets Packets received by the station gt Sent Packets Packets sent by the station gt Configure The button is used for loading the item to the Wireless MAC Filtering list e Allow If the Wireless MAC Filtering function enable allow the station to access e Deny If the Wireless MAC Filtering function enable deny the station to access 54 TL WR710N Eo EAA MIE TT Ve E Ltd To Mm o LL ioa You cannot change any of the values on this page To update this page and to show the current connected wireless stations click on the Refresh button Ifthe numbers of connected wireless stations go beyond one page click the Next button to go to the next page and click the Previous button to return the previous page E Note This page will be refreshed automatically every 5 seconds 4 8 DHCP DHCP Client List Address Reservation Figure 4 28 The DHCP menu There are three submenus under the DHCP menu shown in Figure 4 28 DHCP Settings DHCP Clients List and Address Reservation Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 4 8 1 DHCP Settings Choos
114. ONTENTS a daa dali 1 INTO UICN iaa pidas 2 Overview or the Route 2 CONMVEMUOMS ee iio teeta ty 3 Malmkcatlres ia a 3 Panel Layos ios let Aina 3 Connecting the ROUtOTF ocomnnncccnnninccccnnanccncnnancnn cnc nn rca crean 5 system R quirements 10 ae aidan ne a eae 5 Installation Environment Requirement cccceeeeeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeenaeeeseeeeeeeeteenaees 5 Connecting the Route did 5 2 31 Wireless Router MOOG seanairean ao EEA E E A EEEE 6 2 3 2 Access PolmtiMode cocomicoionii caido aid dba tada 6 2 3 3 Rep ater Mode ista ri paee aaa OaE eE eE EE ie EE 7 Lae ClEBnEM OE ls 8 2 3 5 WISP Client Router Mode assesseer AEREE conc nano nc nr cnn nc narran rn rra rra 8 Quick Installation Guide ooommomnnninnncnnninsrnneccnrecccn src 10 TGP 1P Configuration ii alii 10 Quick Installation Guide ccoo 13 3 21 Wireless Router Mode ii ii oda dei 14 3 2 2 Access Pot MOE aiii e dia tada 17 3 23 Repeater Mode iii aie en edad 19 3 2 4 Client Mode i siicc civestuecctiensincatiablalivead avin a ad adonde 21 3 2 5 WISP ClientiRouter MOGE ieper ara tetitas 23 Configuration for Wireless Router Mode c cccsssseceeseeneeeeeeneeeeseceeeeenseeeeeenseseeenss 27 OG Mess naires Bac cee Te A Ada te tees aac nied ead 27 UALS a 225 2 heed aaa laos 27 QUICK Setups A ieee teat ante eed enti fee a ere oo 30 WPS a r a as ini Mut 30 Working Mode 244 cts AEE eae eA ee Ae Ae ee As 34 NGIWOFkK O A Seine A
115. P client gt MAC Address The MAC address of the DHCP client gt Assigned IP The IP address that the Router has allocated to the DHCP client gt Lease Time The time of the DHCP client leased After the dynamic IP address has expired a new dynamic IP address will be automatically assigned to the user 213 TL WR710N MENTE IET TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o Lio a You cannot change any of the values on this page To update this page and to show the current attached devices click the Refresh button 8 7 3 Address Reservation Choose menu DHCP Address Reservation and then you can view and add a reserved address for clients via the next screen shown in Figure 8 27 When you specify a reserved IP address for a PC on the LAN that PC will always receive the same IP address each time when it accesses the DHCP server Reserved IP addresses should be assigned to the servers that require permanent IP settings Address Reservation 1D MAC Address Reserved IP Address Status Modify 1 00 11 22 33 44 AA 192 168 0 169 Enabled Modify Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure 8 27 Address Reservation gt MAC Address The MAC address of the PC for which you want to reserve an IP address gt Reserved IP Address The IP address reserved for the PC by the Router gt Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled gt Modify To modify or delete an existing entry
116. PSK WPA2 Personal It s the WPA WPA2 authentication type based on pre shared passphrase e Version you can choose the version of the WPA PSK security on the drop down list The default setting is Automatic which can select WPA PSK Pre shared key of WPA or WPA2 PSK Pre shared key of WPA automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e Encryption When WPA PSK or WPA is set as the Authentication Type you can select either Automatic or TKIP or AES as Encryption amp Note If you check the WPA PSK WPA2 PSK radio button and choose TKIP encryption you will find a notice in red as shown in Figure 4 22 49 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa WPA WPA2 Personal Recommended Version Automatic Recommended Encryption TKIP vi Wireless Password You can enter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters between 8 and 64 Group Key Update Period 0 Seconds Keep it default if you are not sure minimum is 30 0 means no update We do not recommend using the TKIP encryption if this device operates in 802 11n mode due to the fact that TKIP is not supported by 802 11n specification Figure 4 22 WPA WPA2 Enterprise It s based on Radius Server Version you can choose the version of the WPA security from the pull down list The default setting is Automatic which can select WPA Wi Fi Protected Access or WPA2 WPA version 2 automatically based o
117. Setting Wireless Name of Root AP TP LINK_Network also called SSID MAC Address of Root AP 94 0C 6D 2F 3C BE Survey You can click the Survey button to scan the network SSIDs and then choose the target one to setup the connection Region United States Warning Ensure you select a correct country to conform local law ncorrect settings may cause interference Wireless Security Mode Most Secure WPAWPA2 PSK v All security settings for example the wireless password should match the Root AP Wireless Password ASCII or Hexadecimal characters For Hexad Y the length should be d 64 characters for ASCII the E ngth should ers For good security it should be of ample length ar nly known pharse ele between 8 and 63 Next Figure 3 17 Quick Setup Wireless gt Wireless Name of Root AP Enter the SSID that you want to access gt MAC Address of Root AP Enter the MAC address of AP that you want to access gt Survey Click this button you can survey the AP which runs in the environment gt Region Select your region from the pull down list This field specifies the region where the wireless function of the Router can be used It may be illegal to use the wireless function of the Router in a region other than one of those specified in this field If your country or region is not listed please contact your local government agency for assistance gt Wireless Security Mode This op
118. Setup will be prompted for the Router s default user name and password E Note The new user name and password must not exceed 14 characters in length and not include any spaces Enter the new Password twice to confirm Click the Save button when finished Click the Clear All button to clear all 186 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o Lio 7 9 7 System Log Choose menu System Tools System Log and then you can view the logs of the Router System Log Auto Mail Feature Disabled Log Type SHARING v Log Level ALL 3 index Tine Type teva 5 Media server stated 22222222 5 1st day 00 11 17 SHARING INFO Media server started 1st day 00 08 07 SHARING NOTICE Network sharing service started 1st day 00 06 23 SHARING NOTICE Network sharing service started 1st day 00 06 20 SHARING NOTICE Network sharing settings changed Time 2013 01 01 1 55 47 6948s H Ver WR710N v1 00000000 S Ver 3 14 4 Build 130128 Rel 36510n 1st day 00 08 06 SHARING NOTICE Network sharing settings changed L 192 168 0 254 M 255 255 255 0 W1 DHCP W 0 0 0 0 M 0 0 0 0 G 0 0 0 0 Mail Log Clear Log EE Next CurrentNo 1 v Page Figure 7 33 System Log gt Refresh Refresh the page to show the latest log list gt Save Log Click to save all the logs in a txt file gt Mail Log Click to send an email of current logs manually according to the a
119. Started O Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 8 34 Media Server Setting 3 Click the Add share folder button to specify a folder as the search path of media server The screen will then appear as shown in Figure 8 35 Add New Folder Display Name video Partition C Share entire partition Folder Location imy share Select Folder O photo video Figure 8 35 Add New Folder gt Display Name You can enter a display name for the share folder gt Share entire partition Choose this option and then the folders contained in this partition will all be shared gt Folder Location Displays the location of this folder gt Select Check the radio button to select the folder to share gt Folder Displays folders that are in current path gt Upper Click this button to get into the upper folder gt Save Click this button to save your settings and the page will be redirected to the media server configuration page 218 TL WR710N MENTE IET TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa gt Back Click this button to discard the settings and just go to the media server configuration page 4 Click the Scan All button to scan all the share folders immediately You can also select the Auto scan at same time select an auto scan interval time by drop down list In this case the media server will auto scan the share folders cf No
120. TP LINK User Guide TL WR710N 150Mbps Wireless N Mini Pocket Router Advanced Edition Rev 1 0 1 1910011079 COPYRIGHT amp TRADEMARKS Specifications are subject to change without notice TP LINK is a registered trademark of TP LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD Other brands and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders No part of the specifications may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative such as translation transformation or adaptation without permission from TP LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD Copyright O 2014 TP LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD All rights reserved http www tp link com FCC STATEMENT HE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of t
121. This type of connection uses a permanent fixed static IP address that your ISP assigned Ned Figure 3 6 Quick Setup WAN Connection Type 14 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o Lio The Router supports three popular ways PPPoE Dynamic IP and Static IP to connect to the Internet To make sure the connection type your ISP provides please refer to the ISP Make sure the cable is securely plugged into the WAN port before detection gt Auto Detect If you don t know the connection type your ISP provides use this option to allow the Quick Setup to search your Internet connection for servers and protocols and determine your ISP configuration gt PPPoE For this connection you will need your account name and password from your ISP If you have applied ADSL to realize Dial up service you should choose this type Under this condition you should fill in both the User Name and Password that the ISP supplied Please note that these fields are case sensitive Quick Setup PPPoE Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt WAN Connection Type gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish User Name username Password ssssseee Confirm Password sssses Next Figure 3 7 Quick Setup PPPoE gt Dynamic IP Your ISP uses a DHCP service to assign your Router an IP address for connecting to the Internet When the Router connects to a DHCP server or the ISP supplies you with DHCP connection
122. Time Settings gt Time Zone Select your local time zone from this pull down list gt Date Enter your local date in MM DD YY into the right blanks gt Time Enter your local time in HH MM SS into the right blanks To set time manually follow the steps below Select your local time zone Enter the Date in Month Day Year format 1 2 3 Enter the Time in Hour Minute Second format 4 Click Save For automatic time synchronization 1 Enter the address of the NTP Server 1 or NTP Server 2 2 Click the Get GMT button to get GMT time from Internet if you have connected to Internet GP Note This setting will be used for some time based functions such as firewall You must specify your time zone once you login to the router successfully if not the time limited on these functions will not take effect gt The time will be lost if the router is turned off 252 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AY Tale Mm o LL ioa gt The router will obtain GMT automatically from Internet if it has already connected to Internet 8 17 2 Diagnostic Choose menu System Tools Diagnostic you can transact Ping or Traceroute function to check connectivity of your network in the following screen Diagnostic Tools Diagnostic Parameters Diagnostic Tool O Ping Traceroute IP Address Domain Name Ping Count 4 1 50 Ping Packet Size 64 4 1472 Bytes Ping Timeout leno 100 2000 Milliseconds Trace
123. Type gt gt vireless gt gt Finish Client Setting SSID TP LINK_Network BSSID 94 0C 6D 2F 3C BE Example 00 1D OF 11 22 33 Survey Key type is selected Key type WPA PSKAWPA2 PSK v WEP Index 1 Auth type open Password 1234567890 AP Setting Local SSID TP LINK_2046F2 Wireless Security Mode Most Secure WPAMWPA2 PSK Wireless Password 123456789 vou can enter ASCII or Hexadecimal characters For Hexadecimal the length should be 8 acters for ASCII the length should be b ch ecurity it should be of ample length and should notbe a ommonty arse Next Figure 3 23 Quick Setup Static IP SSID The SSID of the AP your router is going to connect to as a client You can also use the search function to select the SSID to join BSSID The BSSID of the AP your router is going to connect to as a client You can also use the search function to select the BSSID to join Survey Click this button you can survey the AP which runs in the current channel Key type This option should be chosen according to the AP s security configuration It is recommended that the security type is the same as your AP s security type WEP Index This option should be chosen if the key type is WEP ASCII or WEP HEX It indicates the index of the WEP key Auth type This option should be chosen if the key type is WEP ASCII or WEP HEX It indicates the authorization type of the Root AP Password If the AP your router is going to connect
124. WPA automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e Encryption When WPA PSK or WPA is set as the Authentication Type you can select either Automatic or TKIP or AES as Encryption amp Note If you check the WPA WPA2 Personal radio button and choose TKIP encryption you will find a notice in red as shown in Figure 7 9 170 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tae B o Lio WPA WPA2 Personal Recommended Version Automatic Recommended Y Encryption TKIP he Wireless Password You can enter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters between 8 and 64 Group Key Update Period 0 Seconds Keep it default if you are not sure minimum is 30 0 means no update We do not recommend using the TKIP encryption if this device operates in 802 11n mode due to the fact that TKIP is not supported by 802 11n specification Figure 7 9 WPA WPA2 Enterprise It s based on Radius Server Version you can choose the version of the WPA security from the pull down list The default setting is Automatic which can select WPA Wi Fi Protected Access or WPA2 WPA version 2 automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request Encryption You can select Automatic TKIP or AES Radius Server IP Enter the IP address of the Radius server Radius Port Enter the port that Radius server used Radius Password Enter the password for the Radius server Group Key Update
125. YN FLOOD Attack Filtering TCP SYN FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 50 Packets Secs Ignore Ping Packet from WAN Port to Router Forbid Ping Packet from LAN Portto Router Figure 8 47 Advanced Security gt Packets Statistics Interval 5 60 The default value is 10 Select a value between 5 and 60 seconds from the drop down list The Packets Statistics Interval value indicates the time section of the packets statistics The result of the statistics is used for analysis by SYN Flood UDP Flood and ICMP Flood gt DoS Protection Denial of Service protection Check the Enable or Disable button to enable or disable the DoS protection function Only when it is enabled will the flood filters be enabled c Note Dos Protection will take effect only when the Traffic Statistics in System Tool Traffic Statistics is enabled gt Enable ICMP FLOOD Attack Filtering Enable or Disable the ICMP FLOOD Attack Filtering gt ICMP FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 The default value is 50 Enter a value between 5 3600 When the current ICMP FLOOD Packets number is beyond the set value the Router will startup the blocking function immediately gt Enable UDP FLOOD Filtering Enable or Disable the UDP FLOOD Filtering gt UDP FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 The default value is 500 Enter a value between 5 3600 When the current UPD FLOOD Packets number is beyond the set value the Router will startup the blocki
126. a tr ala aaa 173 MLS Address RESCIVAION a ca 174 7 8 7 9 Chapter 8 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 USB CUINA id 175 1 0 1 Storage Shades EE cteetitigeiaeti cht rr 175 EB Meda OIE cintia ti marae natin een eae dee eee 177 8 3 USEFACCOUNIS iscsi stern areas ele tinet heels tee deeb ART eee 179 System Tod Sicilia dd aged en dd a deena 181 OT Diagnostic inicio ni tidad 181 192 Firmware Upgrade cli barda da ads 183 129 3 Factory Defaults ici A eli elie 184 7 94 Backup amp Restore aaie a eaa aate Eaa a aa aeaiia aa Eat E anaa 184 LID ROO aiid i ee eee 185 A e A NO 186 TOT SYSTEM Oasen E A EAEN 187 Configuration for WISP Client Router Mode cccssseeccssseeeeeseseneeenseeeeeeeseeteeeeeeseenes 188 LOGIN EE E E E iio bdo 188 SAS a a A T e 188 AA E E E E E E EE Ae kee ak 191 Working Mod6 a a a a ei 191 NetWotk ioiei ni AE EEA AE ees eed eh eee 192 354 WAN tdi nt ala 192 802 IMAC Clones tharrkt a irae at ae anette teased hadnt ic 201 Bid S HAIN Sa cater N a a a 202 Wire Sustrato E date 203 3 6 1 Wireless Settings iii Dad TAa NEENA 203 8 6 2 Wireless Securities dd dada ate 206 8 6 3 Wireless MAG FRM ictericia eat 208 8 6 4 Wireless Advanced icons 210 8 6 5 Wireless Statistical titi 211 DA CP E ant eee dee 212 87 1 DIHCP SetINOS uti dat eine ei an 212 8 1 2 DHCP Client list 0c anit noise ida caia 213 8 7 3 Address ResenvatiOn iaa oda 214 USB Settings tu ii da 215
127. a Wireless MAC Address filtering entry click the Add New button The Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry page will appear shown in Figure 5 15 Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry MAC Address Description Status Enabled he Figure 5 15 Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry 116 TL WR710N BBR To eee ig ta TT ood Ck a a Cole C2 mC Ae TL To Mm ao LiLo Ta To add or modify a MAC Address Filtering entry follow these instructions 1 Enter the appropriate MAC Address into the MAC Address field The format of the MAC Address is XX XX XX XX XX XX X is any hexadecimal digit For example 00 0A EB B0 00 0B 2 Give a simple description for the wireless station in the Description field For example Wireless station A 3 Select Enabled or Disabled for this entry on the Status pull down list 4 Click the Save button to save this entry To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify the information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled Click the Disable All button to make all entries disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries Click the Next button to go to the next page Click the Previous button to return to the previous page For example If you desire that the wireless st
128. a password or key 4 17 1 No IP DDNS If the dynamic DNS Service Provider you select is www no ip com the page will appear as shown in Figure 4 85 Service Provider No IP www no ip com v Goto register User Name username Password ss Domain Name C Enable DDNS Connection Status DDNS not launching Figure 4 85 No IP DDNS Settings To set up for DDNS follow these instructions 1 Type the User Name for your DDNS account 2 Type the Password for your DDNS account 3 Type the Domain Name you received from dynamic DNS service provider 4 Click the Login button to log in the DDNS service Connection Status The status of the DDNS service connection is displayed here Click Logout to log out the DDNS service ct Note If you want to login again with another account after a successful login please click the Logout button then input your new username and password and click the Login button 4 17 2 Comexe cn DDNS If the dynamic DNS Service Provider you select is www comexe cn the page will appear as shown in Figure 4 86 92 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve E Tae Mm o Lio Service Provider Comexe www comexe cn Y Goto register Domain Name Domain Name Domain Name Domain Name Domain Name User Name username Password s s C Enable DDNS Connection Status DDNS not launching Save
129. ace your Router e Near the center of the area in which your wireless stations will operate e In an elevated location such as a high shelf e Away from the potential sources of interference such as PCs microwaves and cordless phones e Away from large metal surfaces 141 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve E Tale Mm o LL ioa 2 Failure to follow these guidelines can result in significant performance degradation or inability to wirelessly connect to the Router 6 6 2 Wireless Security Choose menu Wireless Wireless Security and then you can configure the security settings of your wireless network There are three wireless security modes supported by the Router WPA WPA2 Personal WPA WPA2 Enterprise and WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy Wireless Security O Disable Sacurity WPA WPA2 Personal Recommended Version Aulumalic Rezurmnerdedi Y r Encryplion Automatic Rezommerdedi v wireless Password ycu can erter ASCII characters between 8 and b3 or Hexadecimal characters beween 8 and 64 Group Key Update Penod lu Seconds Kees It cefaL it Ifyou ere nat sure minimurr Is 30 0 mens ro update WPA WPA22 Enterprise Version Automatic N Encryption Automatic y Radius Server IP Radius Port f 1812 1 65535 0 stands for cefacit port 1 12 Radius Password Group Key Update Period D in second minimum is 30 0 mea
130. ach submenu are provided below 4 15 1 Control Settings Choose menu Bandwidth Control Control Settings you can configure the Egress Bandwidth and Ingress Bandwidth in the next screen Their values you configure should be less than 100000Kbps For optimal control of the bandwidth please select the right Line Type and ask your ISP for the total bandwidth of the egress and ingress Bandwidth Control Settings Enable Bandwidth Control o Line Type ADSL O Other Egress Bandwidth 512 Kbps Ingress Bandwidth 2048 Kbps Figure 4 77 Bandwidth Control Settings gt Enable Bandwidth Control Check this box so that the Bandwidth Control settings can take effect gt Line Type Select the right type for you network connection If you don t know how to choose please ask your ISP for the information gt Egress Bandwidth The upload speed through the WAN port gt Ingress Bandwidth The download speed through the WAN port 4 15 2 Rule List Choose menu Bandwidth Control Rule List you can view and configure the Bandwidth Control rules in the screen below 87 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AY Tare Mm o LL ioa Bandwidth Control Rule List Egress Bandwidth Kbps Ingress Bandwidth Kbps Description Modify Om w m me The current listis empty Add New Delete All Previous Next Current No 1 v Page Figure 4 78 Bandwidth Control Rule List gt Descr
131. ackets 2346 is the default setting and is recommended gt DTIM Interval This value determines the interval of the Delivery Traffic Indication Message DTIM A DTIM field is a countdown field informing clients of the next window for listening to 210 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa broadcast and multicast messages When the Router has buffered broadcast or multicast messages for associated clients it sends the next DTIM with a DTIM Interval value You can specify the value between 1 255 Beacon Intervals The default value is 1 which indicates the DTIM Interval is the same as Beacon Interval gt Enable WMM WMM function can guarantee the packets with high priority messages being transmitted preferentially It is strongly recommended enabled gt Enable Short GI This function is recommended for it will increase the data capacity by reducing the guard interval time gt Enable AP Isolation This function isolate all connected wireless stations so that wireless stations cannot access each other through WLAN This function will be disabled if WDS Bridge is enabled 32 Note If you are not familiar with the setting items in this page it s strongly recommended to keep the provided default values otherwise it may result in lower wireless network performance 8 6 5 Wireless Statistics Choose menu Wireless Wireless Statistics and then you can see the MAC Address Current Status R
132. ackets Statistics Interval 5 60 The default value is 10 Select a value between 5 and 60 seconds from the drop down list The Packets Statistics Interval value indicates the time section of the packets statistics The result of the statistics is used for analysis by SYN Flood UDP Flood and ICMP Flood gt DoS Protection Denial of Service protection Check the Enable or Disable button to enable or disable the DoS protection function Only when it is enabled will the flood filters be enabled c Note Dos Protection will take effect only when the Traffic Statistics in System Tool Traffic Statistics is enabled gt Enable ICMP FLOOD Attack Filtering Enable or Disable the ICMP FLOOD Attack Filtering gt ICMP FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 The default value is 50 Enter a value between 5 3600 When the current ICMP FLOOD Packets number is beyond the set value the Router will startup the blocking function immediately gt Enable UDP FLOOD Filtering Enable or Disable the UDP FLOOD Filtering gt UDP FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 The default value is 500 Enter a value between 5 3600 When the current UPD FLOOD Packets number is beyond the set value the Router will startup the blocking function immediately 71 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN e AYE Tare Mm o Lio gt Enable TCP SYN FLOOD Attack Filtering Enable or Disable the TCP SYN FLOOD Attack Filtering gt TCP SYN FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 36
133. ade the firmware unless the new firmware has a new feature you want to use However when experiencing problems caused by the Router rather than the configuration you can try to upgrade the firmware 2 When you upgrade the Router s firmware you may lose its current configurations so before upgrading the firmware please write down some of your customized settings to avoid losing important settings 3 Do not turn off the Router or press the Reset button while the firmware is being upgraded otherwise the Router may be damaged 4 The Router will reboot after the upgrading has been finished 5 10 3 Factory Defaults Choose menu System Tools Factory Defaults and you can restore the configurations of the Router to factory defaults on the following screen Factory Defaults Click the following button to reset all configuration settings to their default values Figure 5 37 Restore Factory Default Click the Restore button to reset all configuration settings to their default values gt The default User Name admin gt The default Password admin gt The default IP Address 192 168 0 254 gt The default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 E Note All changed settings will be lost when defaults are restored 5 10 4 Backup 8 Restore Choose menu System Tools Backup 8 Restore and then you can save the current configuration of the Router as a backup file and restore the configuration via a backup file as s
134. admin gt The default Password admin gt The default IP Address 192 168 0 254 gt The default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 c Note All changed settings will be lost when defaults are restored 6 9 4 Backup amp Restore Choose menu System Tools Backup amp Restore and then you can save the current configuration of the Router as a backup file and restore the configuration via a backup file as shown in Figure 6 35 Backup amp Restore Configuration Backup Backup Figure 6 35 Backup 8 Restore Configuration gt Click the Backup button to save all configuration settings as a backup file in your local computer gt To upgrade the Router s configuration follow these instructions e Click the Browse button to locate the update file for the Router or enter the exact path to the Setting file in the text box e Click the Restore button Note The current configuration will be covered by the uploading configuration file The upgrade process lasts for 20 seconds and the Router will restart automatically Keep the Router on during the upgrading process to prevent any damage 161 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN e AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa 6 9 5 Reboot Choose menu System Tools Reboot and then you can click the Reboot button to reboot the Router via the next screen Click this button to reboot this device Figure 6 36 Reboot the Router Some settings of the Router will take ef
135. al area network then you can check the radio button of Dynamic Static IP to activate this secondary connection e Disabled The Secondary Connection is disabled by default so there is PPPoE connection only This is recommended 194 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa e Dynamic IP You can check this radio button to use Dynamic IP as the secondary connection to connect to the local area network provided by ISP e Static IP You can check this radio button to use Static IP as the secondary connection to connect to the local area network provided by ISP gt Connect on Demand In this mode the Internet connection can be terminated automatically after a specified inactivity period Max Idle Time and be re established when you attempt to access the Internet again If you want your Internet connection keeps active all the time please enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet access disconnects gt Connect Automatically The connection can be re established automatically when it was down gt Time based Connecting The connection will only be established in the period from the start time to the end time both are in HH MM format tf Note Only when you have configured the system time on System Tools Time page will the Time based Connecting function can take effect gt Connect Manually You can click
136. ame Old Password New User Name New Password Confirm New Password Figure 4 96 Password It is recommended strongly that you change the factory default user name and password of the router All users who try to access the router s Web based utility or Quick Setup will be prompted Note The new user name and password must not exceed 14 characters in length and must not include any spaces Enter the new Password twice to confirm it Click the Save button when finished Click the Clear All button to clear all 4 18 8 System Log This page allows you to query the logs of the router 100 TL WR710N Eio EAA K TN e AYE Tale Mm o Lio System Log Auto Mail Feature Disabled Mail Settings Log Type SHARING SHARING v Log Level AL M eo a a o es Orue fsteeyo000a7 SeaRING NOTCE Newer snatoseniesaed E 3 1stday 00 08 06 SHARING NOTICE Network sharing settings changed 1st day 00 06 23 SHARING NOTICE Network sharing service started 1 tstday 00 06 20 SHARING NOTICE Network sharing settings changed Time 2013 01 01 1 55 47 6948s H Ver WR710N v1 00000000 S Ver 3 14 4 Build 130128 Rel 36510n L 192 168 0 254 M 255 255 255 0 W1 DHCP W 0 0 0 0 M 0 0 0 0 G 0 0 0 0 Mail Log Clear Log Previous Next CurrentNo 1 w Page Figure 4 97 System Log gt Refresh Refresh the page to show the latest log list gt Save Log
137. an 85 4 14 1 Static Routing Uetersen EA 85 4 14 2 System Routing Table resa iaeia odete eaae tea odada e eae a r Sed EaI aay 86 Bandwidth Controlia eriein diodo dde do dd dai 87 4 191 Control Settings titan idee 87 4152 Rule Listar nio raid dt das 87 PEMA C Bd a A A A laste 89 4 16 Binding Setting dba 89 4 16 2 ARPS Listes isobuster ae ee eed 91 Dynamic DNS mii eed ani eau ada E 91 44 74 NoAlP DDNS vinci enn eae ee ads 92 4 1 2 Gomexe cn DONS ciclista ech ee 92 4 4753 Dyno org DDNS ccoo nasales ada 93 System TOO Sci nae al a ea 94 41851 Time Settings usarla Silvie iat 95 418 2 DIAQNOSUIC si 2 4 ite ais ive a Bn eile 96 4 198 3 Firmware UPOrade ne a E T ode idad ico 97 4 18 4 Factory Doa i eE E REA deviate stilo baii 98 418 5 Backup 3 Restore 8 osc seeecs ceed hace da acess edna eee 99 4 18 6 TS 99 4 18 4 sPASSWOIG 3 iii sea cicswnte chee E E seesstebeeeteien aleciuetecdettaene 100 4 1858 System LOG ericsson 100 4 18 9 Statistical iio diets specs A EE A EEN 101 Configuration for Access Point Mode cccssescseseeeceeeeeneeeeeeseeneesesneeeesesenseseesenens 103 LOGIN sie asia cian 103 Salsa it ota idad linia il 103 Quick Setra ata ira idos 105 WPS pis AAA A A ee ee 105 Working Modes cota aiid endive liane end es 110 NetWork tive aed A ee ae le ee aa ise eis 110 50I EAN ra pe aa tsus ceca a tees hadeatst teat easuta can ints lames ateataa tea steteunea de T fee 110 Wireless cda 111 5 8 5 9 5 10
138. and the min download speed through the WAN port default number is 0 Step 3 Click the Save button 4 16 IP amp MAC Binding IP amp MAC Binding Figure 4 80 The IP amp MAC Binding menu There are two submenus under the IP amp MAC Binding menu Binding Setting and ARP List Click any of them and you will be able to scan or configure the corresponding function The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below 4 16 1 Binding Setting This page displays the IP amp MAC Binding Setting table you can operate it in accord with your desire Binding Settings ARP Binding Disable Enable ID MAC Address IP Address Bind Modify 1 00 0A EB 00 07 BE 192 168 0 173 Modify Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next CurrentNo 1 v Page Figure 4 81 IP amp MAC Binding Setting gt MAC Address The MAC address of the controlled computer in the LAN gt IP Address The assigned IP address of the controlled computer in the LAN gt Bind Whether or not enable the ARP binding gt Modify Edit or delete item 89 TL WR710N MENTE ET TT e AYE Tae Mm o LLO When you want to add or modify an IP MAC Binding entry you can click the Add New button or Modify button and then you will go to the next page This page is used for adding or modifying an IP amp MAC Binding entry IP amp MAC Binding Settings Bind MAC Address IP Address
139. and then you can configure the IP parameters of the WAN on the screen below 1 If your ISP provides the DHCP service please choose Dynamic IP type and the Router will automatically get IP parameters from your ISP You can see the page as follow Figure 8 5 WAN Connection Type Dynamic IP x IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Renew Release WAN port is unplugged MTU Size in bytes 1500 The default is 1500 do not change unless necessary O Use These DNS Servers Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 Optional Host Name TLWR710N CO SetIP with Unicast DHCP lt is usually not required save Figure 8 5 WAN Dynamic IP This page displays the WAN IP parameters assigned dynamically by your ISP including IP address Subnet Mask Default Gateway etc Click the Renew button to renew the IP parameters from your ISP Click the Release button to release the IP parameters 192 TL WR710N RENTES TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa gt MTU Size The normal MTU Maximum Transmission Unit value for most Ethernet networks is 1500 Bytes It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP gt Use These DNS Servers If your ISP gives you one or two DNS addresses select Use These DNS Servers and enter the primary and secondary addresses into the correct fields Otherwise the DNS servers will be assigned dynamica
140. andwidth Control Rule List Egress Bandwidth Kbps Ingress Bandwidth Kbps Description Modify Om w m me The current listis empty Add New Delete All Previous Next Current No 1 v Page Figure 8 74 Bandwidth Control Rule List gt Description This is the information about the rules such as address range gt Egress Bandwidth This field displays the max and mix upload bandwidth through the WAN port the default is O gt Ingress Bandwidth This field displays the max and mix download bandwidth through the WAN port the default is 0 gt Enable This displays the status of the rule gt Modify Click Modify to edit the rule Click Delete to delete the rule To add modify a Bandwidth Control rule follow the steps below Step 1 Click Add New shown in Figure 8 74 you will see a new screen shown in Figure 8 75 Step 2 Enter the information like the screen shown below Bandwidth Control Rule Settings Enable IP Range Port Range 3 Protocol All Min Bandwidth Kbps Max Bandwidth Kbps Egress Bandwidth Do 0 Ingress Bandwidth 0 0 Figure 8 75 Bandwidth Control Rule Settings Enable Enable or disable the rule IP Range Interior PC address range If both are blank or 0 0 0 0 the domain is no effective gt Port Range The port range which the Interior PC access the outside PC If all are blank or 0 the domain is no
141. anually 2 The new settings will not take effect until you restart the service To unplug the USB drive click Eject Disk button first Simply pulling USB drive out of the USB port can cause damage to the device and loss of data 4 Mounted volumes of each USB port are subject to the 8 volume limit So you cannot access more than 8 volumes on the USB storage device 5 If you change the storage settings during the storage connection is established then the changes will not take effect until the router or the client is rebooted 153 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o Lio 6 8 2 Media Server Choose menu USB Settings Media Server you can create media server that allows you to share stored content with other computers and devices on your home network and on the Internet Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Stopped Auto scan every 2 hours gt Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 6 24 Media Server Setting gt Server Name The name of this Media Server gt Server Status Indicates the Media Server s current status started or stopped You can click the Start button to start the Media Server and click the Stop button to stop it gt Name The display name of this folder gt File System The file system type on the partition can be FAT32 or NTFS gt Folder The real full path of the specified folder gt Delete You can del
142. ark Warning C 1588 This is a class B product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Canadian Compliance Statement This device complies with Industry Canada license exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 This device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Cet appareil est conforme aux norms CNR exemptes de licence d Industrie Canada Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes 1 cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d interf rences et 2 cet appareil doit accepter toute interf rence y compris celles susceptibles de provoquer un fonctionnement non souhait de l appareil Industry Canada Statement Complies with the Canadian ICES 003 Class B specifications Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada This Class B device meets all the requirements of the Canadian interference causing equipment regulations Cet appareil num rique de la Classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada NCC Notice amp BSMI Notice ESA ER pS EAS PE EE ARA PRA EPA RNI ER JEKE ls RI AA I
143. ation A with MAC address 00 0A EB B0 00 0B and the wireless station B with MAC address 00 0A EB 00 07 5F are able to access the Router but all the other wireless stations cannot access the Router you can configure the Wireless MAC Address Filtering list by following these steps 1 Click the Enable button to enable this function 2 Select the radio button Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the list to access for Filtering Rules 3 Delete all or disable all entries if there are any entries already 4 Click the Add New button e Enter the MAC address 00 0A EB B0 00 0B 00 0A EB 00 07 5F in the MAC Address field e Enter wireless station A B in the Description field e Select Enabled in the Status pull down list e Click the Save button e Click the Back button The filtering rules that configured should be similar to the following list 117 TL WR710N RENTES TT Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa Filtering Rules Deny the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access ID MAC Address Status Description Modify 1 00 0A EB B0 00 0B Enabled wireless station A Modify Delete 2 00 0A EB 00 07 5F Enabled wireless station B Modify Delete 5 7 4 Wireless Advanced Choose menu Wireless Wireless Advanced and then you can configure the advanced settings of your wireless network Wireless
144. ation in the next screen 4 14 2 System Routing Table Choose menu Advanced Routing System Routing Table and you can views all of the valid route entries in use The Destination IP address Subnet Mask Gateway and Interface will be displayed for each entry System Routing Table ID Destination Network Subnet Mask Gateway Interface 1 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 LAN amp WLAN 2 239 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LAN amp WLAN Figure 4 75 Routing Table gt Destination Network The Destination IP Address is the address of the network or host to which the static route is assigned gt Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask determines which portion of an IP address is the network portion and which portion is the host portion gt Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway device that allows for contact between the Router and the network or host gt Interface This interface tells you whether the Destination IP Address is on the LAN amp WLAN internal wired and wireless networks the WAN Internet Click the Refresh button to refresh the data displayed 86 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa 4 15Bandwidth Control Bandwidth Control Rule List Figure 4 76 The Bandwidth Control menu There are two submenus under the Bandwidth Control menu as shown in Figure 4 76 Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function The detailed explanations for e
145. ation or status for wireless function you can configure them in the Wireless gt Wireless Settings page e Working Mode The current wireless working mode in use Wireless Radio Indicates whether the wireless radio feature of the AP is enabled or disabled Name SSID The SSID of the AP e Mode The current wireless mode which the Router works on Channel Width The current wireless channel width in use Channel The current wireless channel in use e MAC Address The physical address of the Router as seen from the WLAN e WDS Status The status of WDS connection gt WAN This field displays the current settings or information for the WAN you can configure them in the Network gt WAN page e MAC Address The physical address of the WAN port as seen from the Internet e IP Address The current WAN Internet IP Address This field will be blank or 0 0 0 0 if the IP Address is assigned dynamically and there is no connection to the Internet e Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with the WAN IP Address Default Gateway The Gateway currently used by the Router is shown here When you use Dynamic IP as the connection Internet type the Renew button will be displayed here Click the Renew Button to obtain new IP parameters dynamically from the ISP And if you have got an IP address Release button will be displayed here Click the Release button to release the IP address the Router has obtained from the ISP
146. ay Everyday Select Days Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat sun Time all day 24 hours Start Time HHMM Stop Time HHMI Save Back Figure 8 66 Advanced Schedule Settings MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 AA to access www google com only from 18 00 to 20 00 on Saturday and For example If you desire to restrict the internet activities of host with Sunday you should first follow the settings below 1 Click Add New button shown in Figure 8 65 to enter the Advanced Schedule Settings page 2 In Schedule Description field create a unique description for the schedule e g Schedule_1 3 In Day field check the Select Days radio button and then select Sat and Sun 4 InTime field enter 1800 in Start Time field and 2000 in Stop Time field 5 Click Save to complete the settings Then you will go back to the Schedule Settings page and see the following list Schedule Settings ID Schedule Description Day Time Modify 1 Schedule_1 Sat Sun 18 00 20 00 Edit Delete Add New Delete All Prevoius Next Current No 1 w Page Figure 8 67 Schedule Settings 241 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN e AYE Tae Mm o Lio 8 13 Advanced Routing Advanced Routing System Routing Table Figure 8 68 The Advanced Routing Menu There are two submenus under the Network menu shown in Figure 4 72 Static Routing List and System Routing Table Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresp
147. ble IP Address The IP Address displayed with statistics Packet The total amount of packets received and transmitted by the Total router Bytes The total amount of bytes received and transmitted by the router The total amount of packets received and transmitted in the last Packets Packets Statistic interval seconds The total amount of bytes received and transmitted in the last Bytes Packets Statistic interval seconds The total amount of the ICMP packets transmitted to WAN in the current ICMP Tx last Packets Statistic interval seconds The total amount of the UDP packets transmitted to WAN in the UDP Tx last Packets Statistic interval seconds The total amount of the TCP SYN packets transmitted to WAN in TOP SVN Ix the last Packets Statistic interval seconds Click the Save button to save the Packets Statistic interval value Click the Auto refresh checkbox to refresh automatically Click the Refresh button to refresh immediately 102 TL WR710N MENTE IEC MT TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa Chapter 5 Configuration for Access Point Mode This chapter will show each Web page s key functions and the configuration way for Access Point Mode of TL WR710N 5 1 Login After your successful login you can configure and manage the device There are main menus on the left of the web based utility Submenus will be available after you click one of the main menus On the right ther
148. ble All button to enable all the entries Click the Disable All button to disable all the entries Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries Click the Previous button to view the information in the previous screen click the Next button to view the information in the next screen 8 13 2 System Routing Table Choose menu Advanced Routing System Routing Table and you can views all of the valid route entries in use The Destination IP address Subnet Mask Gateway and Interface will be displayed for each entry System Routing Table ID Destination Network Subnet Mask Gateway Interface 1 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 LAN amp WLAN 2 239 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LAN amp WLAN Figure 8 71 Routing Table gt Destination Network The Destination IP Address is the address of the network or host to which the static route is assigned gt Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask determines which portion of an IP address is the network portion and which portion is the host portion gt Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway device that allows for contact between the Router and the network or host gt Interface This interface tells you whether the Destination IP Address is on the LAN amp WLAN internal wired and wireless networks the WAN Internet Click the Refresh button to refresh the data displayed 243 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa 8 14Bandwidth Control
149. c IP Choose either as you are given by your ISP Click the Connect button to connect immediately Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately 198 TL WR710N BRO To eee Ct TT ood k a a Cole C2 mC Ae Taree Mm Lo LiLo Ta gt Connect on Demand You can configure the Router to disconnect from your Internet connection after a specified period of inactivity Max Idle Time If your Internet connection has been terminated due to inactivity Connect on Demand enables the Router to automatically re establish your connection as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again If you wish to activate Connect on Demand check the radio button If you want your Internet connection to remain active at all times enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet connection terminates gt Connect Automatically Connect automatically after the Router is disconnected To use this option check the radio button gt Connect Manually You can configure the Router to make it connect or disconnect manually After a specified period of inactivity Max Idle Time the Router will disconnect from your Internet connection and you will not be able to re establish your connection automatically as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again To use this option check the radio button If you want your Internet connection to remain active at all times enter 0 in the
150. can click the Start button to start the Storage Sharing service and click the Stop button to stop it gt Volume The volume name of the USB drive the users have access to Volume 1 8 is mapping to USB port1 and Volume 9 16 is mapping to USB port2 gt Capacity The storage capacity of the USB driver gt Used The used space of the USB driver gt Free The available space of the USB driver gt Use The percentage of the used space gt Shared Indicates the shared or non shared status of the volume When the volume is shared you can click the Disable to stop sharing the volume when volume is non shared you can click the Enable button to share the volume Click the Start button to start the Network Sharing service Click the Stop button to stop the Network Sharing service Click the Eject Disk button to safely remove the USB storage device that is connected to USB port This takes the drive offline A message as shown in Figure 7 18 will appear on your web browser when it is safe to detach the USB disk Message from webpage O This operation will disable Media Server Are you sure to continue Figure 7 18 Safe Unplug Message 176 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o Lio Click the Rescan button to start a new scan Follow the instructions below to set up your router as a file server 1 Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router Click the Rescan button to fin
151. cessary Figure 3 25 Quick Setup Finish 5 Note The operating distance or range of your wireless connection varies significantly based on the physical placement of the Router For best results place your Router Failure to follow these guidelines can result in significant performance degradation or inability to Near the center of the area in which your wireless stations will operate In an elevated location such as a high shelf Away from the potential sources of interference such as PCs microwaves and cordless phones Away from large metal surfaces wirelessly connect to the Router 26 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AY Tae Mm o LLO Chapter 4 Configuration for Wireless Router Mode This chapter will show each Web page s key functions and the configuration way for Wireless Router Mode of TL WR710N 4 1 Login After your successful login you can configure and manage the device There are main menus on the left of the web based utility Submenus will be available after you click one of the main menus On the right there are the corresponding explanations and instructions Quick Setup WPS Working Mode Network Wireless DHCP USB Settings Forwarding Security Parental Control Access Control Advanced Routing Bandwidth Control IP amp MAC Binding Dynamic DNS System Tools Figure 4 1 The detailed explanations for each Web page s key function are listed below 4 2 Status
152. ck Save to save your choice which is shown as Figure 8 3 Working Mode Wireless Router Enable multiple users to share Internet connection via ADSLCable Modem O Access Point Transform your existing wired network to a wireless network Repeater Extend your existing wireless coverage by relaying wireless signal Client Acting as a Wireless Adapter to connect your wired devices e g XbowPS3 to a wireless network WISP Client Router Enable multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP Save Figure 8 3 Working Mode gt Wireless Router The wireless Router Mode In this mode the device enables multi user to share Internet via DSL Cable Modem The only wired port works as WAN gt Access Point The wireless access point mode gt Repeater The wireless Repeater Mode It could extend the range of wireless network gt Client The Client Mode The computer connected by Ethernet could get access to an AP by Client mode 191 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve E Ltd To Mm o LL ioa gt WISP Client Router In this mode the device enables multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP 8 5 Network MAC Clone LAN Figure 8 4 The Network menu There are three submenus under the Network menu shown in Figure 8 4 WAN MAC Clone and LAN Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 8 5 1 WAN Choose menu Network WAN
153. configuration utility of the WPS as below and enter the PIN code of the AP into the field after Access Point PIN Then click Connect Line E 5 Status WPS Network Profile Advanced w This application will guide you through configuring your wireless network Please choose a method to join a wireless network Push the button on my access point or wireless router 9 Enter the PIN of my access point or wireless router Enter the PIN of this device into my access point or wireless router Connect The WPS Configuration Screen of Wireless Adapter ce Note The default PIN code of the AP can be found in its label or the WPS configuration screen as Figure 4 3 33 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa You will see the following screen when the new device has successfully connected to the network Add A New Device O Enter the new device s PIN PIN Press the button of the new device in two minutes Connect successfully Figure 4 6 E Note 1 The WPS LED on the AP will light green for five minutes if the device has been successfully added to the network 2 The WPS function cannot be configured if the Wireless function of the AP is disabled Please make sure the Wireless function is enabled before configuring the WPS 4 5 Working Mode The Router supports five operation mode types Wireless Router Access Point Repeater Client and Wireless Cli
154. d New button The Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry page will appear shown in Figure 4 24 Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry MAC Address Description Status Enabled i Figure 4 24 Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry 51 TL WR710N BBR To eee ig ta TT ood Ck a a Cole C2 mC Ae TL To Mm ao LiLo Ta To add or modify a MAC Address Filtering entry follow these instructions 1 Enter the appropriate MAC Address into the MAC Address field The format of the MAC Address is XX XX XX XX XX XX X is any hexadecimal digit For example 00 0A EB BO 00 0B 2 Give a simple description for the wireless station in the Description field For example Wireless station A 3 Select Enabled or Disabled for this entry on the Status pull down list 4 Click the Save button to save this entry To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify the information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled Click the Disable All button to make all entries disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries Click the Next button to go to the next page Click the Previous button to return to the previous page For example If you desire that the wireless station A with MAC address 00 0A EB B0 00 0B and the
155. d enter the domain name you should also enter the DNS assigned by your ISP And click the Save button Click the Connect button to connect immediately Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately gt Connect on Demand You can configure the Router to disconnect from your Internet connection after a specified period of inactivity Max Idle Time If your Internet connection has been terminated due to inactivity Connect on Demand enables the Router to automatically re establish your connection as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again If you wish to activate Connect on Demand check the radio button If you want your Internet connection to remain active at all times enter 0 in the Max 200 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet connection terminates gt Connect Automatically Connect automatically after the Router is disconnected To use this option check the radio button gt Connect Manually You can configure the Router to make it connect or disconnect manually After a specified period of inactivity Max Idle Time the Router will disconnect from your Internet connection and you will not be able to re establish your connection automatically as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again To use this option click the radio button If you want your Internet connection to
156. d the USB drive that has been attached to the router Click the Start button to start the Storage Sharing service A WO N Click the Enable button under Shared to enable the disk to share 5 Click the Open the disk to visit the sharing disk E Note 1 The router can automatically locate new USB drive But to display the information about your USB device you need to click the Rescan button manually The new settings will not take effect until you restart the service To unplug the USB drive click Eject Disk button first Simply pulling USB drive out of the USB port can cause damage to the device and loss of data 4 Mounted volumes of each USB port are subject to the 8 volume limit So you cannot access more than 8 volumes on the USB storage device 5 If you change the storage settings during the storage connection is established then the changes will not take effect until the router or the client is rebooted 7 8 2 Media Server Choose menu USB Settings Media Server you can create media server that allows you to share stored content with other computers and devices on your home network and on the Internet Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Stopped Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 7 19 Media Server Setting gt Server Name The name of this Media Server gt Server Status Indicates the Media Server s cu
157. d wireless station B Modify Delete Figure 8 21 Filtering Rules 8 6 4 Wireless Advanced Choose menu Wireless Wireless Advanced and then you can configure the advanced settings of your wireless network Wireless Advanced Transmit Power High Beacon Interval 100 40 1000 RTS Threshold 2346 256 2346 Fragmentation Threshold 2346 256 2346 DTIM Interval 1 1 255 Enable WMM Enable Short Gl C Enable AP Isolation Save Figure 8 22 Wireless Advanced gt Transmit Power Here you can specify the transmit power of Router You can select High Middle or Low which you would like High is the default setting and is recommended gt Beacon Interval Enter a value between 20 1000 milliseconds for Beacon Interval here The beacons are the packets sent by the Router to synchronize a wireless network Beacon Interval value determines the time interval of the beacons The default value is 100 gt RTS Threshold Here you can specify the RTS Request to Send Threshold If the packet is larger than the specified RTS Threshold size the Router will send RTS frames to a particular receiving station and negotiate the sending of a data frame The default value is 2346 gt Fragmentation Threshold This value is the maximum size determining whether packets will be fragmented Setting the Fragmentation Threshold too low may result in poor network performance because of excessive p
158. ddress and validation information set in Mail Settings The result will be shown in the later log soon gt Clear Log All the logs will be deleted from this device permanently not just from the page 187 TL WR710N MENTE IET TN Ve El Tel To Mm o Li ioa Chapter 8 Configuration for WISP Client Router Mode This chapter will show each Web page s key functions and the configuration way for WISP Client Router Mode of TL WR710N 8 1 Login After your successful login you can configure and manage the device There are main menus on the left of the web based utility Submenus will be available after you click one of the main menus On the right there are the corresponding explanations and instructions Status Quick Setup WPS Working Mode Network Wireless DHCP USB Settings Forwarding Security Parental Control Access Control Advanced Routing Bandwidth Control IP amp MAC Binding Dynamic DNS System Tools Figure 8 1 The detailed explanations for each Web page s key function are listed below 8 2 Status The Status page provides the current status information about the Router on WISP Client Router Mode All information is read only 188 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE TaLe Mm o LL ioa Xx Firmware Version 3 14 4 Build 130128 Rel 36510n Hardware Version WR710N v1 00000000 LAN MAC Address D00 1D 0F 01 06 28 IP Address 192 168 0 254 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Wireless Working
159. default is 64 gt Ping Timeout Set the waiting time for the reply of each Ping packet If there is no reply in the specified time the connection is overtime The default is 800 182 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN e AY Tale Mm o Lio gt Traceroute Max TTL The max number of hops for a Traceroute connection The default is 20 Click Start to check the connectivity of the Internet The Diagnostic Results page displays the result of diagnosis If the result is similar to the following screen the connectivity of the Internet is fine Diagnostic Results Pinging 202 108 22 5 with 64 bytes of data REOM 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seg 1 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 2 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 3 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 4 Figure 7 27 Diagnostic Results GP Note u Only one user can use this tool at one time Options Number of Pings Ping Size and Ping Timeout are used for Ping function Option Tracert Hops are used for Tracert function 7 9 2 Firmware Upgrade Choose menu System Tools Firmware Upgrade and then you can update the latest version of firmware for the Router on the following screen Firmware Upgrade Fie Browse Firmware Version 3 14 4 Build 130128 Rel 36510n Hardware Version WR710N v1 00000000 Upgrade Figure 7 28 Firmware Upgrade gt Firmwar
160. e This diagnostic tool tests the performance of a connection Note You can use ping traceroute to test both numeric IP address or domain name If pinging tracerouting the IP address is successful but pinging tracerouting the domain name is not you might have a name resolution problem In this case ensure that the domain name you are specifying can be resolved by using Domain Name System DNS queries gt IP Address Domain Name Type the destination IP address such as 202 108 22 5 or Domain name such as www baidu com Pings Count The number of Ping packets for a Ping connection gt Ping Packet Size The size of Ping packet 96 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o Lio gt Ping Timeout Set the waiting time for the reply of each Ping packet If there is no reply in the specified time the connection is overtime gt Traceroute Max TTL The max number of hops for a Traceroute connection Click Start to check the connectivity of the Internet The Diagnostic Results page displays the result of diagnosis If the result is similar to the following screen the connectivity of the Internet is fine Diagnostic Results Pinging 202 108 22 5 with 64 bytes of data Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 1 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 2 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 3 i Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 4
161. e AYE Tae Mm o Lio Click the Save button to save your settings E Note 1 Only the PC on your LAN can use the MAC Address Clone function 2 If you change WAN MAC Address when the WAN connection is PPPoE it will not take effect until the connection is re established 8 5 3 LAN Choose menu Network LAN and then you can configure the IP parameters of the LAN on the screen as below LAN MAC Address D0 1D 0F 01 06 28 IP Address 192 168 0 254 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 v IGMP Proxy Enable v Note IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol works for IPTY multicast stream The device supports both IGMP proxy with enabled or disable option and IGMP snooping Figure 8 13 LAN gt MAC Address The physical address of the LAN ports as seen from the LAN The value can t be changed gt IP Address Enter the IP address of your Router in dotted decimal notation factory default 192 168 0 254 gt Subnet Mask An address code that determines the size of the network Normally use 255 255 255 0 as the subnet mask gt IGMP Proxy The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP feature allows your devices in LAN can watch TV ce Note 1 If you change the IP Address of LAN you must use the new IP Address to login to the Router 2 Ifthe new LAN IP Address you set is not in the same subnet with the previous one the IP Address pool in the DHCP server will be configured automatically while t
162. e E Tae Mm o Lio Service Provider Comexe www comexe cn Y Goto register Domain Name Domain Name Domain Name Domain Name Domain Name User Name username Password s s C Enable DDNS Connection Status DDNS not launching Save Figure 8 82 Comexe cn DDNS Settings To set up for DDNS follow these instructions 1 Type the Domain Name received from your dynamic DNS service provider 2 Type the User Name for your DDNS account 3 Type the Password for your DDNS account 4 Click the Login button to log in to the DDNS service Connection Status The status of the DDNS service connection is displayed here Click Logout to log out of the DDNS service 8 16 3 Dyndns org DDNS If the dynamic DNS Service Provider you select is www dyndns org the page will appear as shown in Figure 8 83 250 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa Service Provider Dyndns www dyndns org Goto register User Name username Password s s Domain Name O Enable DONS Connection Status DDNS not launching Figure 8 83 Dyndns org DDNS Settings To set up for DDNS follow these instructions 1 Type the User Name for your DDNS account Type the Password for your DDNS account Type the Domain Name you received from dynamic DNS service provider here e oO N Click the
163. e Internet is fine Diagnostic Results Pinging 202 108 22 5 with 64 bytes of data Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 1 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 2 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 3 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 4 Figure 8 87 Diagnostic Results Note Only one user can use this tool at one time Ping Count Ping Packet Size and Ping Timeout are Ping Parameters Traceroute Max TTL is Traceroute Parameter 8 17 3 Firmware Upgrade The page allows you to upgrade the latest version firmware to keep your router up to date Firmware Upgrade File Browse Firmware Version 3 14 4 Build 130128 Rel 36510n Hardware Version WR710N v1 00000000 Figure 8 88 Firmware Upgrade New firmware is posted at www tp link com and can be downloaded for free If the router is not experiencing difficulties there is no need to upgrade firmware unless the new firmware supports a new feature you need 254 TL WR710N RENTES TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa Note Y 3 When you upgrade the router s firmware you will lose current configuration settings so make sure you backup the router s settings before you upgrade its firmware Make sure that your computer is connected to the Internet through the cable when you upgrade the firmware To upgrade through wireless connection is not al
164. e Router records this connection opens the incoming port or ports associated with this entry in the Port Triggering table and associates them with the local host When necessary the external host will be able to connect to the local host using one of the ports defined in the Incoming Ports field Trigger Port The port for outgoing traffic An outgoing connection using this port will trigger this rule Trigger Protocol The protocol used for Trigger Ports either TCP UDP or All all protocols supported by the Router Incoming Ports The port or port range used by the remote system when it responds to the outgoing request A response using one of these ports will be forwarded to the PC that triggered this rule You can input at most 5 groups of ports or port sections Every group of ports must be set apart with For example 2000 2038 2050 2051 2085 3010 3030 Incoming Protocol The protocol used for Incoming Ports Range either TCP or UDP or ALL all protocols supported by the Router Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To add a new rule follow the steps below 1 2 Click the Add New button the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 8 41 Select a common application from the Common Applications drop down list then the Trigger Port field and the Incoming Ports field will be automatically filled If the Common Applications do not have t
165. e Version This displays the current firmware version gt Hardware Version This displays the current hardware version The hardware version of the upgrade file must accord with the Router s current hardware version To upgrade the Router s firmware follow these instructions below 1 Download a more recent firmware upgrade file from the TP LINK website http www tp link com 183 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve Elle To fm o Lio 2 Type the path and file name of the update file into the File field or click the Browse button to locate the update file 3 Click the Upgrade button c Note 1 New firmware versions are posted at http www tp link com and can be downloaded for free There is no need to upgrade the firmware unless the new firmware has a new feature you want to use However when experiencing problems caused by the Router rather than the configuration you can try to upgrade the firmware 2 When you upgrade the Router s firmware you may lose its current configurations so before upgrading the firmware please write down some of your customized settings to avoid losing important settings 3 Do not turn off the Router or press the Reset button while the firmware is being upgraded otherwise the Router may be damaged 4 The Router will reboot after the upgrading has been finished 7 9 3 Factory Defaults Choose menu System Tools Factory Defaults and you can restore the configurations of the Rou
166. e all entries Click the Next button to go to the next page and click the Previous button to return the previous page cf Note If you set the service port of the virtual server as 80 you must set the Web management port on Security Remote Management page to be any other value except 80 such as 8080 Otherwise there will be a conflict to disable the virtual server 4 10 2 Port Triggering Choose menu Forwarding Port Triggering and then you can view and add port triggering in the screen as shown in Figure 4 45 Some applications require multiple connections like Internet games video conferencing Internet calling and so on These applications cannot work 65 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AY Tale Mm o Lio with a pure NAT Router Port Triggering is used for some of these applications that can work with an NAT Router Port Triggering ID Trigger Port Trigger Protocol Incoming Ports Incoming Protocol Status Modify Add New Enable Al Disable A Delete All Previous Next Figure 4 45 Port Triggering Once the Router is configured the operation is as follows 1 A local host makes an outgoing connection using a destination port number defined in the Trigger Port field The Router records this connection opens the incoming port or ports associated with this entry in the Port Triggering table and associates them with the local host When necessary the external host will be able to connect to
167. e are the corresponding explanations and instructions Status Quick Setup WPS Working Mode Network Wreless USB Settings System Tools Figure 5 1 The detailed explanations for each Web page s key function are listed below 5 2 Status The Status page provides the current status information about the Router on Access Point Mode All information is read only 103 TL WR710N 150Mbps Wireless N Mini Pocket Router Advanced Edition Traffic Statistics Firmware Version Hardware Version Working Mode Wireless Network Name 3 14 4 Build 130128 Rel 36510n WR710N v1 00000000 Wired MAC Address 00 1D 0F 01 06 28 IP Address 192 168 0 254 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Wireless Access Point TP LINK_2046F2 Channel Auto Current channel 3 Mode 11bgn mixed Channel Width Automatic MAC Address 00 1D 0F 01 06 28 Received Sent Bytes 0 32 676 Packets 0 79 System Up Time Odays 00 01 34 Figure 5 2 Status Firmware Version The version information of the Router s firmware Hardware Version The version information of the Router s hardware Wired This field displays the current settings or information for the LAN you can configure them in the Network gt LAN page e MAC address The physical address of the Router as seen from the LAN e IP address The LAN IP address of the Router e Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with LAN IP address Wireless This fie
168. e is selected in the Mode field the Channel Width selecting field will turn grey and the value will become 20M which is unable to be changed gt Channel Width Select any channel width from the pull down list The default setting is automatic which can automatically adjust the channel width for your clients gt Wireless Security Mode This option should be chosen according to the security configuration of the AP you want to access It is recommended that the security type is the same as your AP s security type gt Wireless Password Input the password of your broadcast SSID 2 Click the Next button You will then see the Finish page If you don t make any change on the Wireless page you will see the Finish page as shown in Figure 3 12 Click the Finish button to finish the Quick Setup Quick Setup Finish Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish Congratulations This device is now connecting you to the Internet For detail settings please click other menus if necessary Figure 3 12 Quick Setup Finish If there is something changed on the Wireless page you will see the Finish page as shown in Figure 3 13 Click the Reboot button to make your wireless configuration take effect and finish the Quick Setup Quick Setup Finish Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish Congratulations This device is now connecting you to the Internet For detail settings p
169. e is set to Access Point Select menu WPS you will see the next screen shown in Figure 5 3 WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup WPSStatus Enabled Current PIN 12345670 Restore PIN Gen New PIN C Disable PIN of this Device Add A New Device Add Device Figure 5 3 WPS gt WPS Status To enable or disable the WPS function here gt Current PIN The current value of the device s PIN is displayed here The default PIN of the device can be found in the label or User Guide gt Restore PIN Restore the PIN of the device to its default gt Gen New PIN Click this button and then you can get a new random value for the device s PIN You can ensure the network security by generating a new PIN 105 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN e AY Tale Mm o LL ioa gt Disable PIN of this Device WPS external registrar of entering the device s PIN can be disabled or enabled manually If the device receives multiple failed attempts to authenticate an external Registrar this function will be disabled automatically gt Add Device You can add a new device to the existing network manually by clicking this button To add a new device If the wireless adapter supports Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS you can establish a wireless connection between wireless adapter and device using either Push Button Configuration PBC method or PIN method Note To build a successful connection by WPS you should also do the corresponding confi
170. e menu DHCP DHCP Settings and then you can configure the DHCP Server on the page as shown in Figure 4 29 The Router is set up by default as a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server which provides the TCP IP configuration for all the PC s that are connected to the Router on the LAN DHCP Server Disable Enable Start IP Address 192 168 0 100 EndIP Address 192 168 0 199 Address Lease Time 120 minutes 1 2880 minutes the default value is 120 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 Optional Default Domain Optional Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Optional Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 i Optional Figure 4 29 DHCP Settings gt DHCP Server Enable or Disable the DHCP server If you disable the Server you must have another DHCP server within your network or else you must configure the computer manually 55 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa gt Start IP Address Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to start with when assigning IP addresses 192 168 0 100 is the default start address gt End IP Address Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to end with when assigning IP addresses 192 168 0 199 is the default end address gt Address Lease Time The Address Lease Time is the amount of time a network user will be allowed connection to the Router with their current dynamic IP Address Enter the amount of time in minutes and the user will be leased this dy
171. e supports both IGMP proxy with enable or disable option and IGMP snooping Figure 6 5 LAN v MAC Address The physical address of the LAN ports as seen from the LAN The value can t be changed gt Type Choosing Smart IP DHCP to get IP address from DHCP server or choosing static IP to config IP address manually v IP Address Enter the IP address of your system in dotted decimal notation factory default 192 168 0 254 gt Subnet Mask An address code that determines the size of the network Normally 255 255 255 0 is used as the subnet mask gt IGMP Proxy The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP feature allows your devices in LAN can watch TV cf Note 1 If you change the IP Address of LAN you must use the new IP Address to login to the Router 2 If the new LAN IP Address you set is not in the same subnet with the previous one the IP Address pool in the DHCP server will be configured automatically while the Virtual Server and DMZ Host will not take effect until they are re configured 139 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa 6 6 Wireless Wireless Wireless Security Wireless MAC Filtering Wireless Advanced Wireless Statistics Figure 6 6 Wireless menu There are five submenus under the Wireless menu shown in Figure 6 6 Wireless Settings Wireless Security MAC Filtering Wireless Advanced and Wireless Statistics Click it and you will be able t
172. eceived Packets and Sent Packets for each connected wireless station Wireless Statistics Current Connected Wireless Stations numbers 1 ID MAC Address Current Status Received Packets Sent Packets Configure 1 70 73 CB 1F C8 C9 STA ASSOC 46 16 Previous Next Figure 8 23 Wireless Statistics gt MAC Address The connected wireless station s MAC address gt Current Status The connected wireless station s running status one of STA AUTH STA ASSOC STA JOINED WPA WPA PSK WPA2 WPA2 PSK AP UP AP DOWN Disconnected gt Received Packets Packets received by the station gt Sent Packets Packets sent by the station gt Configure The button is used for loading the item to the Wireless MAC Filtering list e Allow If the Wireless MAC Filtering function enable allow the station to access e Deny If the Wireless MAC Filtering function enable deny the station to access 211 TL WR710N Eo EAA MIE TT Ve E Ltd To Mm o LL ioa You cannot change any of the values on this page To update this page and to show the current connected wireless stations click on the Refresh button Ifthe numbers of connected wireless stations go beyond one page click the Next button to go to the next page and click the Previous button to return the previous page E Note This page will be refreshed automatically every 5 seconds 8 7 DHCP DHCP Client List Address Reservation Figure 8 24 The DHCP me
173. ecurity O Disable Security WPAMPA2 Personal Recommended Version Automatic Rezommerdedi v Encryption Automatic Rezormerdedi ho Wireless Password Ccu can erter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters beween 8 and 64 Group Key Update Period n Seconds Kees it cefault if you ere nat sure minimurr is 30 Omeens ro ugdate WPAWPA2 Enterprise Version Automatic bs Encryption Aulurmalic b Radius Server IP Radius Port 18912 1 65535 0 stands Tor ceracit port 1 1 2 Radius Password Group Key Update Period o in second minirnurn is 30 0 means no Jpdate O WEP Type Autorratic v WEP Key Format Hexadecimal y Key Selected WEP Key Key Type Key 1 Disabled ij Key 2 Disahled v Key 3 Disabled Key 4 Disabled Figure 7 8 Wireless Security Disable Security The wireless security function can be enabled or disabled If disabled the wireless stations will be able to connect the Router without encryption But it s strongly recommended to choose one of the following modes to enable security WPA PSK WPA2 Personal It s the WPA WPA2 authentication type based on pre shared passphrase e Version you can choose the version of the WPA PSK security on the drop down list The default setting is Automatic which can select WPA PSK Pre shared key of WPA or WPA2 PSK Pre shared key of
174. ed service please contact us Avoid water and wet locations This product can be used in the following countries E i LI N K TP LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY For the following equipment Product Description 150Mbps Wireless N Mini Pocket Router Advanced Edition Model No TL WR710N Trademark TP LINK We declare under our own responsibility that the above products satisfy all the technical regulations applicable to the product within the scope of Council Directives Directives 1999 5 EC Directives 2004 108 EC Directives 2006 95 EC Directives 1999 519 EC Directives 2011 65 EU The above product is in conformity with the following standards or other normative documents ETSI EN 300 328 V1 7 1 2006 ETSI EN 301 489 1 V1 9 2 2011 amp ETSI EN 301 489 17 V2 2 1 2012 EN 55022 2010 EN 55024 2010 EN 61000 3 2 2006 A1 2009 A2 2009 EN 61000 3 3 2008 EN 60950 1 2006 A11 2009 A1 2010 A12 2011 EN 62311 2008 The product carries the CE Mark C 1588 Person is responsible for making this declaration Yang Hongliang Product Manager of International Business Date of issue 2014 TP LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD Building 24 floors 1 3 4 5 and 28 floors 1 4 Central Science and Technology Park Shennan Rd Nanshan Shenzhen China Package Contents Chapter 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 Chapter 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 Chapter 3 3 1 3 2 Chapter 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 C
175. eless Statistics Choose menu Wireless Wireless Statistics and then you can see the MAC Address Current Status Received Packets and Sent Packets for each connected wireless station Wireless Statistics Current Connected Wireless Stations numbers 1 ID MAC Address Current Status Received Packets Sent Packets Configure 1 70 73 CB 1F C8 C9 STA ASSOC 46 16 Previous Next Figure 6 14 Wireless Statistics gt MAC Address The connected wireless station s MAC address gt Current Status The connected wireless station s running status one of STA AUTH STA ASSOC STA JOINED WPA WPA PSK WPA2 WPA2 PSK AP UP AP DOWN Disconnected 147 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN e AY Tae Mm o LL ioa gt Received Packets Packets received by the station gt Sent Packets Packets sent by the station gt Configure The button is used for loading the item to the Wireless MAC Filtering list You cannot change any of the values on this page To update this page and to show the current connected wireless stations click on the Refresh button If the numbers of connected wireless stations go beyond one page click the Next button to go to the next page and click the Previous button to return the previous page GP Note This page will be refreshed automatically every 5 seconds 6 7 DHCP DHCP DHCP Client List Address Reservation Figure 6 15 The DHCP menu There are three submenus under
176. en you can configure the security settings of your wireless network There are three wireless security modes supported by the Router WPA WPA2 Personal WPA WPA2 Enterprise and WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy 48 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AY Tare Mm o LL ioa Wireless Security O Disable Security WPAMPA2 Personal Recommended Version Automatic Rezommerdedi v Encryption Automatic Rezormerdedi ho Wireless Password Ccu can erter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters beween 8 and 64 Group Key Update Period n Seconds Kees it cefault if you ere nat sure minimurr is 30 Omeens ro ugdate WPAWPA2 Enterprise Version Automatic bs Encryption Aulurmalic b Radius Server IP Radius Port 18912 1 65535 0 stands Tor ceracit port 1 1 2 Radius Password Group Key Update Period o in second minirnurn is 30 0 means no Jpdate O WEP Type Autorratic v WEP Key Format Hexadecimal y Key Selected WEP Key Key Type Key 1 Disabled ij Key 2 Disahled v Key 3 Disabled Key 4 Disabled Figure 4 21 Wireless Security Disable Security The wireless security function can be enabled or disabled If disabled the wireless stations will be able to connect the Router without encryption But it s strongly recommended to choose one of the following modes to enable security WPA
177. ened by default and the default password is the last unique eight numbers of each Router s MAC address TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o Lio Wired Ethernet pa Connection Figure 2 2 Hardware Installation of the TL WR710N in AP Mode 1 Connect the LAN or LAN WAN port of TL WR710N to the wired network port with an Ethernet cable 2 Plug the power plug of TL WR710N in electrical wall socket 3 Power on the PC s and notebook s 2 3 3 Repeater Mode TL WR710N is used to extend the range of wireless signal of the existing AP or wireless router On this mode the wired port LAN WAN works as LAN Computer could connect to the device by either wired or wireless way The SSID of TL WR710N should be the same as that of the device you repeat Figure 2 3 Hardware Installation of the TL WR710N in Repeater Mode 1 Plug the power plug of TL WR710N in electrical wall socket Te TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa 2 Power on the notebook s E Note It is recommended that you connect a PC notebook to the LAN port of the Router with an Ethernet cable and then login the Router from the PC notebook to set the Router in Repeater mode 2 3 4 Client Mode TL WR710N is used as a wireless network card to connect the wireless network signal or wireless router On this mode the wired port LAN WAN works as LAN Computer could connect to the device by either wired or wireless way SSID abc Fi
178. ent Router Please select one you want Click Save to save your choice which is shown as Figure 4 7 Working Mode Wireless Router Enable multiple users to share Internet connection via ADSL Cable Modem Access Point Transform your existing wired network to a wireless network O Repeater Extend your existing wireless coverage by relaying wireless signal O Client Acting as a Wireless Adapter to connect your wired devices e g XbowPS3 to a wireless network WISP Client Router Enable multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP Save Figure 4 7 Wireless Working Mode Settings gt Wireless Router The wireless Router Mode In this mode the device enables multi user to share Internet via DSL Cable Modem The only wired port works as WAN gt Access Point The wireless access point mode gt Repeater The wireless Repeater Mode It could extend the range of wireless network gt Client The Client Mode The computer connected by Ethernet could get access to an AP by Client mode 34 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AY Tale Mm o LL ioa gt WISP Client Router In this mode the device enables multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP 4 6 Network Network MAC Clone LAN Figure 4 8 the Network menu There are three submenus under the Network menu shown in Figure 4 8 WAN MAC Clone and LAN Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresp
179. ent Router Please select one you want Click Save to save your choice which is shown as Figure 7 3 Working Mode Wireless Router Enable multiple users to share Internet connection via ADSL Cable Modem O Access Point Transform your existing wired network to a wireless network Repeater Extend your existing wireless coverage by relaying wireless signal Client Acting as a Wireless Adapter to connect your wired devices e g XbowPS3 to a wireless network WISP Client Router Enable multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP Save Figure 7 3 Working Mode gt Wireless Router The wireless Router Mode In this mode the device enables multi user to share Internet via DSL Cable Modem The only wired port works as WAN gt Access Point The wireless access point mode gt Repeater The wireless Repeater Mode It could extend the range of wireless network gt Client The Client Mode The computer connected by Ethernet could get access to an AP by Client mode 166 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve E Ltd To Mm o LL ioa gt WISP Client Router In this mode the device enables multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP 7 5 Network Figure 7 4 the Network menu There is only one submenu under the Network menu shown in Figure 7 4 LAN 7 5 1 LAN Choose menu Network LAN and then you can configure the IP parameters of the LAN on the screen as below
180. er as a file server 1 Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router 2 Click the Rescan button to find the USB drive that has been attached to the router 3 Click the Start button to start the Storage Sharing service 4 Click the Enable button under Shared to enable the disk to share 5 Click the Open the disk to visit the sharing disk E Note 1 The router can automatically locate new USB drive But to display the information about your USB device you need to click the Rescan button manually 2 The new settings will not take effect until you restart the service 59 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa 3 To unplug the USB drive click Eject Disk button first Simply pulling USB drive out of the USB port can cause damage to the device and loss of data 4 Mounted volumes of each USB port are subject to the 8 volume limit So you cannot access more than 8 volumes on the USB storage device 5 If you change the storage settings during the storage connection is established then the changes will not take effect until the router or the client is rebooted 4 9 2 Media Server Choose menu USB Settings Media Server you can create media server that allows you to share stored content with other computers and devices on your home network and on the Internet Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Stopped Auto scan every 2 hours Scan A
181. er by entering your domain name no 248 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve Me Tare Mm o LL ioa matter what your IP address is Before using this feature you need to sign up for DDNS service providers such as www no ip com www comexe cn or www dyndns org The Dynamic DNS client service provider will give you a password or key 8 16 1 No IP DDNS If the dynamic DNS Service Provider you select is www no ip com the page will appear as shown in Figure 8 81 Service Provider No IP www no ip cam v Goto register User Name username Password s s s Domain Name C Enable DDNS Connection Status DDNS not launching Figure 8 81 No IP DDNS Settings To set up for DDNS follow these instructions 1 Type the User Name for your DDNS account 2 Type the Password for your DDNS account 3 Type the Domain Name you received from dynamic DNS service provider 4 Click the Login button to log in the DDNS service Connection Status The status of the DDNS service connection is displayed here Click Logout to log out the DDNS service amp Note If you want to login again with another account after a successful login please click the Logout button then input your new username and password and click the Login button 8 16 2 Comexe cn DDNS If the dynamic DNS Service Provider you select is www comexe cn the page will appear as shown in Figure 8 82 249 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN V
182. es the last unique six numbers of each Routers MAC address But it is recommended strongly that you change your networks name SSID to a different value This value is case sensitive For example TEST is NOT the same as test gt Region Select your region from the pull down list This field specifies the region where the wireless function of the Router can be used It may be illegal to use the wireless function of 46 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN e AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa the Router in a region other than one of those specified in this field If your country or region is not listed please contact your local government agency for assistance gt Mode Select the desired mode The default setting is 11bgn mixed e 11bg mixed Select if you are using both 802 11b and 802 11g wireless clients e 11bgn mixed Select if you are using a mix of 802 11b 11g and 11n wireless clients When 11bg mixed mode is selected only 11bg mixed wireless stations can connect to the Router It is strongly recommended that you set the Mode to 11bgn mixed and all of 802 11b g n wireless stations can connect to the Router E Note If 11bg mixed mode is selected in the Mode field the Channel Width selecting field will turn grey and the value will become 20M which is unable to be changed gt Channel Width Select any channel width from the pull down list The default setting is automatic which can automatically adjust the channel width for your cl
183. ess Advanced Transmit Power High Beacon Interval 100 40 1000 RTS Threshold 2346 256 2346 Fragmentation Threshold 2346 256 2346 DTIM Interval 1 1 255 Enable WMM Enable Short Gl C Enable AP Isolation Save Figure 4 26 Wireless Advanced gt Transmit Power Here you can specify the transmit power of Router You can select High Middle or Low which you would like High is the default setting and is recommended gt Beacon Interval Enter a value between 20 1000 milliseconds for Beacon Interval here The beacons are the packets sent by the Router to synchronize a wireless network Beacon Interval value determines the time interval of the beacons The default value is 100 gt RTS Threshold Here you can specify the RTS Request to Send Threshold If the packet is larger than the specified RTS Threshold size the Router will send RTS frames to a particular receiving station and negotiate the sending of a data frame The default value is 2346 gt Fragmentation Threshold This value is the maximum size determining whether packets will be fragmented Setting the Fragmentation Threshold too low may result in poor network performance because of excessive packets 2346 is the default setting and is recommended gt DTIM Interval This value determines the interval of the Delivery Traffic Indication Message DTIM A DTIM field is a countdown field informing clients of the next window
184. et connection via ADSL Cable Modem In Access Point mode this device can be connected to a wired network and transform the wired access into wireless that multiple devices can share together In Repeater mode the device will relay data to an associated root AP In Client mode the device will act as a wireless station to enable wired host s to access AP In WISP Client Router mode the device enables multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP You can configure your device quickly by the following steps in different modes 3 2 1 Wireless Router Mode When you choose Wireless Router on Working Mode page in Figure 3 5 take the following steps 1 Click Next in Figure 3 5 and then WAN Connection Type page will appear as shown in Figure 3 6 Quick Setup WAN Connection Type Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt WAN Connection Type gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish The Quick Setup is preparing to set up your connection type of WAN port The Router will try to detect the Internet connection type your ISP provides if you select the Auto Detect option Otherwise you need to specify the connection type manually Auto Detect Let the Router automatically detect the connection type your ISP provides PPPoE Usually for ADSL Modem and you will need a PPPoE username and password from your ISP Dynamic IP Usually for Cable Modem and the router will automatically obtain an IP address from the DHCP server Static IP
185. ete the share folder by click Delete To set up your media server please follow the instructions below 1 Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router and then the screen will appear as shown in Figure 6 25 Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Stopped Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 6 25 Media Server Setting 2 Click the Start button to start the media server and then the screen will appear as shown in Figure 6 26 154 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN e AY Tale Mm o Lio Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Started E Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 6 26 Media Server Setting 3 Click the Add share folder button to specify a folder as the search path of media server The screen will then appear as shown in Figure 6 27 Add New Folder Display Name video Partition C Share entire partition Folder Location imy share Select Folder upper O photo video Figure 6 27 Add New Folder gt Display Name You can enter a display name for the share folder gt Share entire partition Choose this option and then the folders contained in this partition will all be shared gt Folder Location Displays the location of this folder gt Select Check
186. fect only after rebooting including Change the LAN IP Address system will reboot automatically Change the DHCP Settings Change the Wireless configurations Change the Web Management Port Upgrade the firmware of the Router system will reboot automatically Restore the Router s settings to factory defaults system will reboot automatically Vv Vv VW Y VY V Y Update the configuration with the file system will reboot automatically 6 9 6 Password Choose menu System Tools Password and then you can change the factory default user name and password of the Router in the next screen as shown in Figure 6 37 The username and password must not exceed 14 characters in length and must not include any spaces Old User Name Old Password New User Name New Password Confirm New Password Ceara Figure 6 37 Password It is strongly recommended that you should change the factory default user name and password of the Router because all users who try to access the Router s Web based utility or Quick Setup will be prompted for the Router s default user name and password 162 TL WR710N MENTE IET TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o Lio E Note The new user name and password must not exceed 14 characters in length and not include any spaces Enter the new Password twice to confirm Click the Save button when finished Click the Clear All button to clear all 6 9 7 System Log Choose
187. field The password must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length For security purposes the password for each user account is not displayed gt Storage Authority Choose Read and Write or Read Only from the drop down list to assign access authority of Storage Sharing to the user gt Save You can click the Save button to save your settings gt Back You can click the Back button to discard the settings and just go to the media server configuration page amp Note Please restart the service for the new settings to take effect If you cannot use the new user name and password to access the shares press Windows logo R to open the Run dialog box and type net use 192 168 0 254 delete yes and press Enter 192 168 0 254 is your router s LAN IP address If the LAN IP of the modem connected with your router is 192 168 1 x the default LAN IP of the router will automatically switch from 192 168 0 254 to 192 168 1 254 to avoid IP conflict in this case please try net use 192 168 1 254 delete yes 4 10 Forwarding Forwarding Port Triggering DMZ UPnP Figure 4 42 The Forwarding menu 63 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN e E Tae Mm o LL ioa There are four submenus under the Forwarding menu shown in Figure 4 42 Virtual Servers Port Triggering DMZ and UPnP Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 4 10 1 Virtual Servers
188. for listening to 53 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa broadcast and multicast messages When the Router has buffered broadcast or multicast messages for associated clients it sends the next DTIM with a DTIM Interval value You can specify the value between 1 255 Beacon Intervals The default value is 1 which indicates the DTIM Interval is the same as Beacon Interval gt Enable WMM WMM function can guarantee the packets with high priority messages being transmitted preferentially It is strongly recommended enabled gt Enable Short GI This function is recommended for it will increase the data capacity by reducing the guard interval time gt Enable AP Isolation This function isolate all connected wireless stations so that wireless stations cannot access each other through WLAN This function will be disabled if WDS Bridge is enabled t Note If you are not familiar with the setting items in this page it s strongly recommended to keep the provided default values otherwise it may result in lower wireless network performance 4 7 5 Wireless Statistics Choose menu Wireless Wireless Statistics and then you can see the MAC Address Current Status Received Packets and Sent Packets for each connected wireless station Wireless Statistics Current Connected Wireless Stations numbers 1 ID MAC Address Current Status Received Packets Sent Packets Configure 1 70 73 CB 1F C8 C9 STA ASS
189. forwards all the ports at the same time Any PC whose port is being forwarded must have its DHCP client function disabled and should have a new static IP Address assigned to it because its IP Address may be changed when using the DHCP function 67 TL WR710N MENTE MIE IT TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa DMZ Current DMZ Status Enable Disable DMZ Host IP Address 0 0 0 0 Figure 4 47 DMZ To assign a computer or server to be a DMZ server 1 Check the Enable radio button 2 Enter the IP Address of a local host in the DMZ Host IP Address field 3 Click the Save button Note After you set the DMZ host the firewall related to the host will not work 4 10 4 UPnP Choose menu Forwarding UPnP and then you can view the information about UPnP Universal Plug and Play in the screen as shown in Figure 4 48 The UPnP feature allows the devices such as Internet computers to access the local host resources or devices as needed UPnP devices can be automatically discovered by the UPnP service application on the LAN UPnP Current UPnP Status Enabled Current UPnP Settings List ID App Description External Port Protocol Internal Port IP Address Status Figure 4 48 UPnP gt Current UPnP Status UPnP can be enabled or disabled by clicking the Enable or Disable button gt Current UPnP Settings List This table displays the current UPnP information e App Description The description provided
190. gion where the wireless function of the Router can be used It may be illegal to use the wireless function of the Router in a region other than one of those specified in this field If your country or region is not listed please contact your local government agency for assistance gt Wireless Security Mode This option should be chosen according to the security configuration of the AP you want to access It is recommended that the security type is the same as your AP s security type gt Wireless Password If the AP your router is going to connect need password you need to fill the password in this blank Click Survey button on the Wireless page as shown in Figure 6 7 and then AP List page will appear as shown in Figure 6 8 Find the SSID of the Access Point you want to access and click Connect in the corresponding row For example the third item is selected The target network s SSID will be automatically filled into the corresponding box which is shown as the Figure 6 7 AP List AP Count 16 ppo p CN CC 2 94 00 60 2F 3C BE P LINK_Network 4748 a PA2 PSK Connect D E poesTocxccca framo pref here ramet MTS TOO ECU JA ZN 00 Back Refresh gt Figure 6 8 AP List Be sure to click the Save button to save your settings on this page ce Note 1 The operating distance or range of your wireless connection varies significantly based on the physical placement of the Router For best results pl
191. gt Firewall A firewall protects your network from the outside world Here you can enable or disable the Router s firewall e SPI Firewall SPI Stateful Packet Inspection also known as dynamic packet filtering helps to prevent cyber attacks by tracking more state per session lt validates that the 69 TL WR710N BRO To eee ta UN o AYZ To Mm Lo 14 Toda traffic passing through the session conforms to the protocol SPI Firewall is enabled by factory default If you want all the computers on the LAN exposed to the outside world you can disable it gt VPN VPN Passthrough must be enabled if you want to allow VPN tunnels using IPSec PPTP or L2TP protocols to pass through the Router s firewall e PPTP Passthrough Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP allows the Point to Point Protocol PPP to be tunneled through an IP network To allow PPTP tunnels to pass through the Router keep the default Enable e L2TP Passthrough Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol L2TP is the method used to enable Point to Point sessions via the Internet on the Layer 2 level To allow L2TP tunnels to pass through the Router keep the default Enable e IPSec Passthrough Internet Protocol Security IPSec is a suite of protocols for ensuring private secure communications over Internet Protocol IP networks through the use of cryptographic security services To allow IPSec tunnels to pass through the Router keep the default Enable
192. gt Update the configuration with the file system will reboot automatically 133 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN e AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa 5 10 6 Password Choose menu System Tools Password and then you can change the factory default user name and password of the Router in the next screen as shown in Figure 5 40 The username and password must not exceed 14 characters in length and must not include any spaces Old User Name Old Password New User Name New Password Confirm New Password Figure 5 40 Password It is strongly recommended that you should change the factory default user name and password of the Router because all users who try to access the Router s Web based utility or Quick Setup will be prompted for the Router s default user name and password E Note The new user name and password must not exceed 14 characters in length and not include any spaces Enter the new Password twice to confirm Click the Save button when finished Click the Clear All button to clear all 134 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o Lio 5 10 7 System Log Choose menu System Tools System Log and then you can view the logs of the Router System Log Auto Mail Feature Disabled Log Type SHARING v Log Level ALL 3 index Tine Type teva 5 Media server stated 22222222 5 1st day 00 11 17 SHARING INFO Media server started 1st day 00 08 07 SHARING
193. guration of the new device for WPS function meanwhile For the configuration of the new device here takes the Wireless Adapter of our company for example ll By PBC If the wireless adapter supports Wi Fi Protected Setup and the Push Button Configuration PBC method you can add it to the network by PBC with the following two methods Method One Step 1 Keep the WPS Status as Enabled and click the Add Device button in Figure 5 3 then the following screen will appear Add A New Device Enter the new device s PIN PIN rress the button of the new device in two minutes Figure 5 4 Add A New Device Step 2 Choose Press the button of the new device in two minutes and click Connect Step 3 For the configuration of the wireless adapter please choose Push the button on my access point or wireless router in the configuration utility of the WPS as below and click Connect 106 TL WR710N BRO Toye el ext TA cd a a Cole C MAC AEs te e LiLo TETINK a 3 Network This application will guide you through configuring your wireless network WPS Please choose a method to join a wireless network Push the button on my access point or wireless router Enter the PIN of my access point or wireless router O Enter the PIN of this device into my access point or wireless router The WPS Configuration Screen of Wireless Adapter Step 4 Wait for a while until the next scree
194. gure 2 4 Hardware Installation of the TL WR710N in Client Mode 1 Connect the PC to the LAN or LAN WAN port of TL WR710N router with an Ethernet cable 2 Plug the power plug of TL WR710N in electrical wall socket 3 Power on the PC s 2 3 5 WISP Client Router Mode In WISP mode TL WR710N enables multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP On this mode the LAN port devices share the same IP from WISP through Wireless port While connecting to WISP the Wireless port works as a WAN port at WISP Client Router mode The Ethernet port acts as a LAN port TL WR710N RENTES MIE TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o Lio SSID def A SSID abc Figure 2 5 Hardware Installation of the TL WR710N in WISP Client Router Mode 1 Plug the power plug of TL WR710N in electrical wall socket 2 Power on the notebook s TL WR710N RENTES TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa Chapter 3 Quick Installation Guide This chapter will show you how to configure the basic functions of your TL WR710N 150Mbps Wireless N Mini Pocket Router Advanced Edition using Quick Setup Wizard within minutes 3 1 TCP IP Configuration The default IP address of the TL WR710N 150Mbps Wireless N Mini Pocket Router Advanced Edition is 192 168 0 254 And the default Subnet Mask is 255 255 255 0 These values can be changed as you desire In this guide we use all the default values for description Connect the local PC to the LAN port of the Router And then you can
195. gure 8 50 The Parental Control function can be used to control the internet activities of the child limit the child to access certain websites and restrict the time of surfing Parental Control Settings Non Parental PCs not listed will not be able to access the Internet Parental Control Disable Enable MAC Address of Parental PC MAC Address of Your PC l6 c 62 6d f7 31 8d Copy To Above ID MAC address Website Description Schedule Status Modify Add New Enable All Disable All Delete A Previous Next Current No 1 Page Figure 8 50 Parental Control Settings gt Parental Control Check Enable if you want this function to take effect otherwise check Disable gt MAC Address of Parental PC In this field enter the MAC address of the controlling PC or you can make use of the Copy To Above button below gt MAC Address of Your PC This field displays the MAC address of the PC that is managing this Router If the MAC Address of your adapter is registered you can click the Copy To Above button to fill this address to the MAC Address of Parental PC field above gt Website Description Description of the allowed website for the PC controlled gt Schedule The time period allowed for the PC controlled to access the Internet For detailed information please go to Access Restriction Schedule gt Modify Here you can edit or delete an existing entry To add a new entry
196. he Virtual Server and DMZ Host will not take effect until they are re configured 202 TL WR710N RENTES AT e AYE Tae Mm o Lio 8 6 Wireless Wireless Wireless Security Wireless MAC Filtering Wireless Advanced Wireless Statistics Figure 8 14 Wireless menu There are five submenus under the Wireless menu shown in Figure 8 14 Wireless Settings Wireless Security Wireless MAC Filtering Wireless Advanced and Wireless Statistics Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 8 6 1 Wireless Settings Choose menu Wireless Wireless Settings and then you can configure the basic settings for the wireless network on this page Wireless Settings Client Setting SSID TP LINK_Network BSSID 94 0C 6D 2F 3C BE Example 00 1D 0F 11 22 33 Key type WPA PSKAWPA2 PSK WEP Index 1 Auth type open Password 1234567890 AP Setting Local SSID TP LINK_2046F2 Enable Wireless Router Radio Enable SSID Broadcast O Disable Local Wireless Access Save Figure 8 15 Wireless Security gt Disable Security The wireless security function can be enabled or disabled If disabled the wireless stations will be able to connect the Router without encryption But it s strongly recommended to choose one of the following modes to enable security 203 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tare Mm
197. he application you need enter the Trigger Port and the Incoming Ports manually Select the protocol used for Trigger Port from the Trigger Protocol drop down list either TCP UDP or All 223 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa 4 Select the protocol used for Incoming Ports from the Incoming Protocol drop down list either TCP or UDP or All 5 Select Enable in Status field 6 Click the Save button to save the new rule Add or Modify a Port Triggering Entry Trigger Port Trigger Protocol All Incoming Ports Incoming Protocol All Y Status Enabled Common Applications Select One Y Figure 8 42 Add or Modify a Port Triggering Entry To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify the information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled Click the Disable All button to make all entries disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries E Note 1 When the trigger connection is released the corresponding opening ports will be closed 2 Each rule is allowed to be used only by one host on LAN synchronously The trigger connection of other hosts on LAN will be refused 3 Incoming Port Range cannot overlap each other 8 9 3 DMZ Choose menu Forwarding DMZ and then you can view a
198. he following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment Such modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter This equipment has been SAR evaluated for use in hand SAR measurements are based on a 5mm spacing from the body and that compliance is achieved at that distance CE M
199. he information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled Click the Disable All button to make all entries disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries Click the Next button to go to the next page Click the Previous button to return to the previous page For example If you desire that the wireless station A with MAC address 00 0A EB BO0 00 0B and the wireless station B with MAC address 00 0A EB 00 07 5F are able to access the Router but all the other wireless stations cannot access the Router you can configure the Wireless MAC Address Filtering list by following these steps 1 Click the Enable button to enable this function 2 Select the radio button Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the list to access for Filtering Rules 3 Delete all or disable all entries if there are any entries already 145 TL WR710N RENTES TN Ve Eller To Mm o Lio 4 Click the Add New button e Enter the MAC address 00 0A EB B0 00 0B 00 0A EB 00 07 5F in the MAC Address field e Enter wireless station A B in the Description field e Select Enabled in the Status pull down list e Click the Save button e Click the Back button The filtering rules that configured should be similar to the following list Filtering Rules Deny the stations specified by any enabled entries in the list to access Allow the stations specified by any enabled en
200. how to install and configure the TCP IP correctly in Windows XP First make sure your Ethernet Adapter is working refer to the adapter s manual if necessary 1 Configure TCP IP component 1 On the Windows taskbar click the Start button and then click Control Panel 2 Click the Network and Internet Connections icon and then click on the Network Connections tab in the appearing window 3 Right click the icon that showed below select Properties on the prompt page LAN or High Speed Internet ireless Network Connection 49 onnected p y L_ p Disable View Available Wireless Networks Status Repair Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Rename MT Figure B 0 1 4 Inthe prompt page that showed below double click on the Internet Protocol TCP IP 265 TL WR710N MENTE IET TN Ve AY Tale Mm o LL ioa T 4 Wireless Network Connection 49 Properties General Advanced Connect using ES EZ Connect N 150Mbps Wireless N L This connection uses the following items Y 2 00s Packet Scheduler Y YF AEGIS Protocol IEEE 802 1 v3 7 5 0 a Internet Protocol TCP IP lt gt Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Show icon in notification area when connected Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity F
201. hown in Figure 5 38 132 TL WR710N MENTE MIE LT Ve AY Tale Mm o LL ioa Backup 8 Restore Configuration Backup Backup Configuration Fie Figure 5 38 Backup amp Restore Configuration gt Click the Backup button to save all configuration settings as a backup file in your local computer gt To upgrade the Router s configuration follow these instructions e Click the Browse button to locate the update file for the Router or enter the exact path to the Setting file in the text box e Click the Restore button c Note The current configuration will be covered by the uploading configuration file The upgrade process lasts for 20 seconds and the Router will restart automatically Keep the Router on during the upgrading process to prevent any damage 5 10 5 Reboot Choose menu System Tools Reboot and then you can click the Reboot button to reboot the Router via the next screen Click this button to reboot this device Figure 5 39 Reboot the Router Some settings of the Router will take effect only after rebooting which include gt Change the LAN IP Address system will reboot automatically gt Change the DHCP Settings gt Change the Wireless configurations gt Change the Web Management Port gt Upgrade the firmware of the Router system will reboot automatically gt Restore the Router s settings to factory defaults system will reboot automatically
202. ice in two minutes Figure 5 5 Add A New Device Method Three Enter the PIN from my AP Step 1 Get the Current PIN code of the AP in Figure 5 3 each AP has its unique PIN code Here takes the PIN code 12345670 of this AP for example 108 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa Step 2 For the configuration of the wireless adapter please choose Enter the PIN of my access point or wireless router in the configuration utility of the WPS as below and enter the PIN code of the AP into the field after Access Point PIN Then click Connect TP LINK a g Status WPS Network Profile Advanced w This application will guide you through configuring your wireless network Please choose a method to join a wireless network gt Push the button on my access point or wireless router 9 Enter the PIN of my access point or wireless router Enter the PIN of this device into my access point or wireless router Connect The WPS Configuration Screen of Wireless Adapter c Note The default PIN code of the AP can be found in its label or the WPS configuration screen as Figure 5 3 You will see the following screen when the new device has successfully connected to the network Add A New Device O Enter the new device s PIN PIN Press the button of the new device in two minutes Connect successfully Figure 5 6 Note 1 The WPS LED on the AP will light
203. ick the radio button If you want your Internet connection to remain active at all times enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number in minutes that you wish to have the Internet connecting last unless a new link is requested Caution Sometimes the connection cannot be disconnected although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background Click the Save button to save your settings 4 6 2 MAC Clone Choose menu Network MAC Clone and then you can configure the WAN MAC address on the screen below as shown in Figure 4 16 WAN MAC Address 00 1D 0F 01 06 29 Restore Factory MAC Your PC s MAC Address 6C 62 6D F7 31 8D Clone MAC Address Figure 4 16 MAC Address Clone Some ISPs require that you register the MAC Address of your adapter Changes are rarely needed here gt WAN MAC Address This field displays the current MAC address of the WAN port If your ISP requires you to register the MAC address please enter the correct MAC address into this field in XX XX XX XX XX XX format X is any hexadecimal digit gt Your PC s MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the PC that is managing the Router If the MAC address is required you can click the Clone MAC Address To button and this MAC address will fill in the WAN MAC Address field Click Restore Factory MAC to restore the MAC address of WAN port to the fact
204. ients Vv Channel This field determines which operating frequency will be used The default channel is set to Auto It is not necessary to change the wireless channel unless you notice interference problems with another nearby access point gt Enable Wireless Router Radio The wireless radio of the Router can be enabled or disabled to allow wireless stations access If enabled the wireless stations will be able to access the Router Otherwise wireless stations will not be able to access the Router gt Enable SSID Broadcast If you select the Enable SSID Broadcast checkbox the wireless router will broadcast its name SSID on the air gt Enable WDS You can select to enable WDS With this function the Router can bridge two or more WLANs If this checkbox is selected you will have to set the following parameters as shown below Make sure the following settings are correct Enable WDS Bridging SSID to be bridged BSSID to be bridged Example 00 1D 0F 11 22 33 Key type None amp WEP Index 1 Auth type Open S Password Figure 4 20 Wireless Settings WDS Bridging gt SSID to be bridged The SSID of the AP your Router is going to connect to as a client You can also use the search function to select the SSID to join 47 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TT Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL iog gt BSSID to be bridged The BSSID of the AP your Router is going to connect to as a client Yo
205. igure B 0 2 5 The following TCP IP Properties window will display and the IP Address tab is open on this window by default 6 Select Obtain an IP address automatically Choose Obtain DNS server automatically as shown in the Figure below 266 TL WR710N MENTE MIE LT Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Figure B 0 3 cf Note For Windows 98 OS or before the PC and Router may need to be restarted 7 Click OK to keep your settings 267 TL WR710N BRO To exec ta TT ood C3 a a Cole ETT To Mm ao LiLo Ta Appendix C Specifications General Standards IEEE 802 11n 802 11b 802 11g Protocols TCP IP PPPoE DHCP ICMP NAT SNTP Port One 10 100Mbps LAN WAN port One 10 100Mbps LAN port 10BASE T UTP category 3 4 5 cable maximum 100m EIA TIA 568 1000 STP maximum 100m Cabling Type 100BASE TX UTP category 5 5e cable maximum 100m EIA TIA 568 1000 STP maximum 100m LED SYS Dimensions LxWxH 81mm x 71mm x 28mm Safety amp Emissions FCC CE Wireless Frequency Band 2 4 2 4835GHz 11n up to 150Mbps Aut
206. ioa 8 17 5 Backup 8 Restore This page allows you to save current configuration of router as backup or restore the configuration file you saved before Backup amp Restore Configuration Backup Backup Configuration Fie Figure 8 90 Backup amp Restore Configuration gt Click the Backup button to save all configuration settings as a backup file in your local computer gt To restore the router s configuration follow these instructions e Click the Browse button to select the backup file which you want to restore e Click the Restore button Note The current configuration will be covered with the uploading configuration file The restoration process lasts for 20 seconds and the router will restart automatically Keep the router on during the restoring process to prevent any damage 8 17 6 Reboot This page allows you to reboot the router Click this button to reboot this device Figure 8 91 Reboot the router Click the Reboot button to reboot the router Some settings of the router will take effect only after rebooting which include gt gt gt Change LAN IP Address System will reboot automatically MAC Clone system will reboot automatically DHCP service function Static address assignment of DHCP server Web Service Port of the router 256 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN e E Tae Mm o LL ioa gt Upgrade the firmware of the router system will reboot auto
207. ion gt Protocol The protocol used for this application either TCP UDP or All all protocols supported by the Router gt Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled gt Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To setup a virtual server entry 1 Click the Add New button the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 8 39 2 Select the service port you want to use from the Common Service Port list If the Common Service Port list does not have the service that you want to use type the service port number or service port range in the Service Port box 3 Type the IP Address of the computer in the IP Address box 221 TL WR710N Eo EAA MIE TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa 4 Select the protocol used for this application either TCP UDP or All 5 Select the Enable to enable the virtual server 6 Click the Save button Add or Modify a Virtual Server Entry Service Port SA Internal Port XX Only valid for single Service Port or leave it blank IP Address Protocol All he Status Enabled Nj Common Service Port Select One v Figure 8 40 Add or Modify a Virtual Server Entry E Note If your computer or server has more than one type of available service please select another service and enter the same IP Address for that computer or server To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify
208. iption This is the information about the rules such as address range gt Egress Bandwidth This field displays the max and mix upload bandwidth through the WAN port the default is O gt Ingress Bandwidth This field displays the max and mix download bandwidth through the WAN port the default is 0 gt Enable This displays the status of the rule gt Modify Click Modify to edit the rule Click Delete to delete the rule To add modify a Bandwidth Control rule follow the steps below Step 1 Click Add New shown in Figure 4 78 you will see a new screen shown in Figure 4 79 Step 2 Enter the information like the screen shown below Bandwidth Control Rule Settings Enable IP Range Port Range Protocol An Y Min Bandwidth Kbps Max Bandwidth Kbps Egress Bandwidth D 0 Ingress Bandwidth 0 o Figure 4 79 Bandwidth Control Rule Settings Enable Enable or disable the rule IP Range Interior PC address range If both are blank or 0 0 0 0 the domain is no effective gt Port Range The port range which the Interior PC access the outside PC If all are blank or 0 the domain is no effective gt Protocol Transport layer protocol here there are All TCP UDP 88 TL WR710N Elo EAA KIE TT Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa gt Egress Bandwidth The max and the min upload speed which through the WAN port default number is 0 gt Ingress Bandwidth The max
209. irelessly connect to the Router 5 7 2 Wireless Security Choose menu Wireless Wireless Security and then you can configure the security settings of your wireless network There are three wireless security modes supported by the Router WPA WPA2 Personal WPA WPA2 Enterprise and WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy 113 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AY Tare Mm o LL ioa Wireless Security O Disable Security WPAMPA2 Personal Recommended Version Automatic Rezommerdedi v Encryption Automatic Rezormerdedi ho Wireless Password Ccu can erter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters beween 8 and 64 Group Key Update Period n Seconds Kees it cefault if you ere nat sure minimurr is 30 Omeens ro ugdate WPAWPA2 Enterprise Version Automatic bs Encryption Aulurmalic b Radius Server IP Radius Port 18912 1 65535 0 stands Tor ceracit port 1 1 2 Radius Password Group Key Update Period o in second minirnurn is 30 0 means no Jpdate O WEP Type Autorratic v WEP Key Format Hexadecimal y Key Selected WEP Key Key Type Key 1 Disabled ij Key 2 Disahled v Key 3 Disabled Key 4 Disabled Figure 5 12 Wireless Security Disable Security The wireless security function can be enabled or disabled If disabled the wireless stations will be able to connect the Ro
210. irewall protections the TL WR710N 150Mbps Wireless N Mini Pocket Router Advanced Edition provides complete data privacy Flexible Access Control The TL WR710N 150Mbps Wireless N Mini Pocket Router Advanced Edition supports Virtual Server and DMZ host for Port Triggering and then the network administrators can manage and monitor the network in real time with the remote management function Since the Router is compatible with virtually all the major operating systems it is very easy to manage Quick Setup Wizard is supported and detailed instructions are provided step by step in oe TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa this user guide Before installing the Router please look through this guide to know all the Router s functions 1 2 Conventions The Router or TL WR710N mentioned in this guide stands for TL WR710N 150Mbps Wireless N Mini Pocket Router Advanced Edition without any explanation Parameters provided in the pictures are just references for setting up the product which may differ from the actual situation You can set the parameters according to your demand 1 3 Main Features Portable design ideal for travel and home use Built in power supply design without external power adapter Support Wireless Router Access Point Repeater Client WISP Client Router modes USB port supports charging for smart phone and tablet USB port supports storage sharing media server function Vv Vv VV WV WV
211. isted will not be able to access the Internet Parental Control Disable Enable MAC Address of Parental PC MAC Address of Your PC l6 c 62 6d f7 31 8d Copy To Above ID MAC address Website Description Schedule Status Modify Add New Enable All Disable All Delete A Previous Next Current No 1 Page Figure 4 54 Parental Control Settings gt Parental Control Check Enable if you want this function to take effect otherwise check Disable gt MAC Address of Parental PC In this field enter the MAC address of the controlling PC or you can make use of the Copy To Above button below gt MAC Address of Your PC This field displays the MAC address of the PC that is managing this Router If the MAC Address of your adapter is registered you can click the Copy To Above button to fill this address to the MAC Address of Parental PC field above gt Website Description Description of the allowed website for the PC controlled gt Schedule The time period allowed for the PC controlled to access the Internet For detailed information please go to Access Control Schedule gt Modify Here you can edit or delete an existing entry To add a new entry please follow the steps below 1 Click the Add New button and the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 4 55 2 Enter the MAC address of the PC e g 00 11 22 33 44 AA you d like to control in the MAC Address of Child PC field
212. its stations and the root AP for greater wireless range Universal Repeater In Repeater mode the AP with WDS disabled will relay data to an associated root AP AP function is enabled meanwhile WDS Repeater In WDS Repeater mode the AP with WDS enabled will relay data to an associated root AP AP function is enabled meanwhile Wireless Name of Root AP The SSID of AP that you want to access MAC Address of Root AP The MAC address of AP that you want to access Survey Click this button you can search the AP which runs in the environment Region Select your region from the pull down list This field specifies the region where the wireless function of the Router can be used It may be illegal to use the wireless function of the Router in a region other than one of those specified in this field If your country or region is not listed please contact your local government agency for assistance Wireless Security Mode This option should be chosen according to the security configuration of the AP you want to access It is recommended that the security type is the same as your AP s security type 20 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve E Tare Mm o LL ioa gt Wireless Password If the AP your router is going to connect need password you need to fill the password in this blank 2 Click Survey button on the Wireless page as shown in Figure 3 14 and then AP List page will appear as shown in Figure 3 15 Find the SSID of the
213. l entries Click the Next button to go to the next page and Click the Previous button to return the previous page 151 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve Elle To Mm o LL ioa 6 8 USB Settings USB Settings Media Server User Accounts Figure 6 21 The USB Settings menu There are three submenus under the USB Settings menu shown in Figure 6 21 Storage Sharing Media Server and User Accounts Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions 6 8 1 Storage Sharing Choose menu USB Settings Storage Sharing you can configure a USB disk drive attached to the router and view volume and share such properties as share name capacity used space and free space on this page as shown below Storage Sharing Service Status Started O Access shared storage with password Volume Capacity Used Free Use Shared volume 1 96B 1 36B 626 MB 67 Eject Disk Rescan Figure 6 22 Storage Sharing gt Service Status Indicates the Network Sharing service s current status You can click the Start button to start the Storage Sharing service and click the Stop button to stop it gt Volume The volume name of the USB drive the users have access to Volume 1 8 is mapping to USB port1 and Volume 9 16 is mapping to USB port2 gt Capacity The storage capacity of the USB driver gt Used The used space of the USB driver gt Free The available space of the USB driver
214. ld displays basic information or status for wireless function you can configure them in the Wireless gt Wireless Settings page e Working Mode The current wireless working mode in use e Wireless Network Name The SSID of the AP e Channel The current wireless channel in use e Mode The current wireless mode which the Router works on 104 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL io e Channel Width The current wireless channel width in use e MAC Address The physical address of the Router as seen from the WLAN gt Traffic Statistics The Router s traffic statistics e Received Bytes Traffic that counted in bytes has been received out from the WAN port e Received Packets Traffic that counted in packets has been received out from the WAN port Sent Bytes Traffic that counted in bytes has been sent out from the WAN port e Sent Packets Traffic that counted in packets has been sent out from the WAN port gt System Up Time The length of the time since the Router was last powered on or reset Click the Refresh button to get the latest status and settings of the Router 5 3 Quick Setup Please refer to Section 3 2 Quick Installation Guide 5 4 WPS WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup can help you to quickly and securely connect to a network This section will guide you to add a new wireless device to an existing network quickly by function The WPS function is only available when the Operation Mod
215. le O Disable IPSec Passthrough Enable Disable ALG FTP ALG Enable Disable TFTP ALG Enable Disable H323 ALG Enable Disable RTSP ALG Enable Disable Figure 8 46 Basic Security gt Firewall A firewall protects your network from the outside world Here you can enable or disable the Router s firewall e SPI Firewall SPI Stateful Packet Inspection also known as dynamic packet filtering helps to prevent cyber attacks by tracking more state per session lt validates that the 226 TL WR710N BRO To eee ta UN o AYZ To Mm Lo 14 Toda traffic passing through the session conforms to the protocol SPI Firewall is enabled by factory default If you want all the computers on the LAN exposed to the outside world you can disable it gt VPN VPN Passthrough must be enabled if you want to allow VPN tunnels using IPSec PPTP or L2TP protocols to pass through the Router s firewall e PPTP Passthrough Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP allows the Point to Point Protocol PPP to be tunneled through an IP network To allow PPTP tunnels to pass through the Router keep the default Enabled e L2TP Passthrough Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol L2TP is the method used to enable Point to Point sessions via the Internet on the Layer 2 level To allow L2TP tunnels to pass through the Router keep the default Enabled e IPSec Passthrough Internet Protocol Security IPSec is a suite of
216. lease click other menus if necessary Figure 3 13 Quick Setup Finish 3 2 3 Repeater Mode When you choose Repeater Mode on Working Mode page in Figure 3 5 take the following steps 1 Click Next and then Wireless Repeater page will appear as shown in Figure 3 14 19 TL WR710N 150Mbps Wireless N Mini Pocket Router Advanced Edition Quick Setup Wireless Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt Vvireless gt gt Finish Repeater Mode Setting Repeater Mode Universal Repeater WDS Repeater Wireless Name of Root AP TP LINK_Network also called SSID MAC Address of Root AP 94 0C 6D 2F 3C BE You can click the Survey button to scan the network SSIDs and then choose the target one to setup the connectior Region United States Y Warning Ensure you selecta correct country to conform local law Incorrect settings may cause interference Wireless Security Mode Most Secure VW WPANYPA2 PSK All security settings for example the wireless password should match the Root AP Wireless Password fou can enter ASCII or Hexadecimal characters For Hexadecimal the length should be between 8 and 64 characters for ASCII the length should be between 8 and 63 characters For good security it should be of ample length and should notbe a commonly known pharse Back Next Figure 3 14 Quick Setup Wireless Repeater Mode In Repeater mode the wireless repeater relays signal between
217. lick the Save button Click the Enable All button to enable all the rules in the list Click the Disable All button to disable all the rules in the list Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table You can change the entry s order as desired Fore entries are before hind entries Enter the ID number in the first box you want to move and another ID number in second box you want to move to and then click the Move button to change the entry s order Click the Next button to go to the next page or click the Previous button return to the previous page Add Internet Access Control Entry Rule Name Host g Click Here To Add New Host List Target Any Target Y Click Here To Add New Target List Schedule Anytime V Click Here To Add New Schedule Status Enabled save Back Figure 4 59 Add or Modify Internet Access Restriction Entry For example If you desire to allow the host with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 AA to access www google com only from 18 00 to 20 00 on Saturday and Sunday and forbid other hosts in the LAN to access the Internet you should follow the settings below 1 Click Access Control Host in the left to enter the Host Settings page Add a new entry with the Host Description is Host_1 and MAC Address is 00 11 22 33 44 AA Click Access Control Target in the left to enter the Target Settings page Add a new entry with the Target Descrip
218. licy can take effect Rule Name Here displays the name of the rule and this name is unique Host Here displays the host selected in the corresponding rule Target Here displays the target selected in the corresponding rule Schedule Here displays the schedule selected in the corresponding rule Action Here displays the action the Router takes to deal with the packets It could be Allow or Deny Allow means that the Router permits the packets to go through the Router Deny means that the Router rejects the packets to go through the Router Status This field displays the status of the rule Enabled means the rule will take effect Disabled means the rule will not take effect Modify Here you can edit or delete an existing rule To add a new rule please follow the steps below 1 2 3 4 Click the Add New button and the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 4 59 Give a name e g Rule_1 for the rule in the Rule Name field Select a host from the Host drop down list or choose Click Here To Add New Host List Select a target from the Target drop sown list or choose Click Here To Add New Target List Select a schedule from the Schedule drop down list or choose Click Here To Add New Schedule 177 6 7 8 TL WR710N MENTE E TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o Lio a In the Action field select Deny or Allow In the Status field select Enabled or Disabled to enable or disable your entry C
219. ll Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 4 36 Media Server Setting gt Server Name The name of this Media Server gt Server Status Indicates the Media Server s current status started or stopped You can click the Start button to start the Media Server and click the Stop button to stop it gt Name The display name of this folder gt File System The file system type on the partition can be FAT32 or NTFS gt Folder The real full path of the specified folder gt Delete You can delete the share folder by click Delete To set up your media server please follow the instructions below 1 Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router and then the screen will appear as shown in Figure 4 37 Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Stopped Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 4 37 Media Server Setting 60 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AY Tae Mm o Lio 2 Click the Start button to start the media server and then the screen will appear as shown in Figure 4 38 Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Started O Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 4 38 Media Server Setting 3 Click the Add share folder button to specify a folder as the search path of media se
220. lly from your ISP tf Note If you find error when you go to a website after entering the DNS addresses it is likely that your DNS servers are set up improperly You should contact your ISP to get DNS server addresses gt Host Name This option specifies the Host Name of the Router gt Get IP with Unicast DHCP A few ISPs DHCP servers do not support the broadcast applications If you cannot get the IP Address normally you can choose this option It is rarely required Click the Save button to save your settings 2 If your ISP provides a static or fixed IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway and DNS setting select Static IP The Static IP settings page will appear as shown in Figure 8 6 WAN Connection Type Static IP x IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 MTU Size in bytes 1500 The default is 1500 do not change unless necessary Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 Optional Figure 8 6 WAN Static IP gt IP Address Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation provided by your ISP gt Subnet Mask Enter the subnet Mask in dotted decimal notation provided by your ISP usually is 255 255 255 0 gt Default Gateway Enter the gateway IP address in dotted decimal notation provided by your ISP 193 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN e E Tare Mm o LL ioa gt MTU Size The normal MTU Maximum Transmission Unit value for most Ethernet net
221. low DHCP Settings DHCP Server Disable Enable Start IP Address 92 168 0 100 End IP Address 92 168 0 199 Address Lease Time 20 minutes 1 2880 minutes the default value is 120 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 Optional Default Domain Mn Optional Primary DNS 192 168 0 254 Optional Secondary DNS 92 168 0 254 Optional Note The DHCP Settings function cannot be configured if you have choosed Smart IP DHCP in Network gt LAN in this situation the device will help you configure the DHCP automaticaly as you need save Figure 7 12 DHCP Settings 7 7 2 DHCP Client List Choose menu DHCP DHCP Client List and then you can view the information about the clients attached to the Router in the screen as shown in Figure 7 13 173 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL io DHCP Client List ID Client Name MAC Address Assigned IP Lease Time 1 tplink14129 6C 62 6D F7 31 8D 192 168 0 100 01 15 47 2 Unknown 70 73 CB 1F C8 C9 192 168 0 101 01 56 32 Figure 7 13 DHCP Clients List Client Name The name of the DHCP client MAC Address The MAC address of the DHCP client Assigned IP The IP address that the Router has allocated to the DHCP client Lease Time The time of the DHCP client leased After the dynamic IP address has expired a new dynamic IP address will be automatically assigned to the user You cannot change any of the values on this page To update this page
222. lowed Set your IP address as static IP before upgrading To upgrade the router s firmware follow these instructions 1 Download the latest firmware upgrade file from our website http www tp link com 2 Enter or select the path name where you save the downloaded file on the computer into the File blank Click the Upgrade button gt Firmware Version Displays the current firmware version gt Hardware Version Displays the current hardware version The hardware version of the upgrade file must accord with the current hardware version Note The firmware version must correspond to the hardware The upgrade process takes a few minutes and the Router will restart automatically when the upgrade is completed It is important to keep power on during the entire process Loss of power during the upgrade could damage the Router 8 17 4 Factory Defaults This page allows you to restore the factory default settings for the router Factory Defaults Click the following button to reset all configuration settings to their default values Figure 8 89 Restore Factory Default Click the Restore button to reset all configuration settings to their default values gt The default User Name admin gt The default Password admin gt The default access tplinklogin net Note Any settings you have saved will be lost when the default settings are restored 255 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL
223. lt Gateway Optional It is suggested to input the IP address of the LAN port of the Router The default value is 192 168 0 254 gt Default Domain Optional Input the domain name of your network gt Primary DNS Optional Input the DNS IP address provided by your ISP or consult your ISP gt Secondary DNS Optional Input the IP address of another DNS server if your ISP provides two DNS servers Note 1 To use the DHCP server function of the Router you must configure all computers on the LAN as Obtain an IP Address automatically 2 When you choose the Smart IP DHCP mode in Network LAN the DHCP Server function will be disabled You will see the page as below DHCP Settings DHCP Server Disable Enable Start IP Address 92 168 0 100 End IP Address 9 168 0 199 Address Lease Time 20 minutes 1 2880 minutes the default value is 120 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 Optional Default Domain Mn Optional Primary DNS 192 168 0 254 Optional Secondary DNS 92 168 0 254 Optional Note The DHCP Settings function cannot be configured if you have choosed Smart IP DHCP in Network gt LAN in this situation the device will help you configure the DHCP automaticaly as you need Save Figure 5 20 DHCP Settings 5 8 2 DHCP Client List Choose menu DHCP DHCP Clients List and then you can view the information about the clients attached to the Router in the screen as shown in
224. lt LAN IP of the router will automatically switch from 192 168 0 254 to 192 168 1 254 to avoid IP conflict in this case please try net use 192 168 1 254 delete yes 5 10 System Tools System Tools Firmware Upgrade Factory Defaults Backup amp Restore Reboot Password System Log Figure 5 33 The System Tools menu Choose menu System Tools and then you can see the submenus under the main menu Diagnostic Firmware Upgrade Factory Defaults Backup amp Restore Reboot Password and System Log Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below 5 10 1 Diagnostic Choose menu System Tools Diagnostic and then you can transact Ping or Traceroute function to check connectivity of your network in the following screen 129 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa Diagnostic Tools Diagnostic Parameters Diagnostic Tool O Ping Traceroute IP Address Domain Name Ping Count atid 1 50 Ping Packet Size 64 4 1472Bytes Ping Timeout 800 100 2000 Milliseconds Traceroute Max TTL Po 1 30 Diagnostic Results This device is ready Figure 5 34 Diagnostic Tools gt Diagnostic Tool Check the radio button to select one diagnostic tool e Ping This diagnostic tool troubleshoots connectivity reachability and name resolution to a given ho
225. lt setting is Automatic which can select WPA Wi Fi Protected Access or WPA2 WPA version 2 automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request Encryption You can select Automatic TKIP or AES Radius Server IP Enter the IP address of the Radius server Radius Port Enter the port that Radius server used Radius Password Enter the password for the Radius server Group Key Update Period Specify the group key update interval in seconds The value should be 30 or above Enter 0 to disable the update WEP It is based on the IEEE 802 11 standard Type you can choose the type for the WEP security on the pull down list The default setting is Automatic which can select Shared Key or Open System authentication type automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request WEP Key Format Hexadecimal and ASCII formats are provided here Hexadecimal format stands for any combination of hexadecimal digits 0 9 a f A F in the specified length ASCII format stands for any combination of keyboard characters in the specified length WEP Key Password Select which of the four keys will be used and enter the matching WEP key that you create Make sure these values are identical on all wireless stations in your network Key Type You can select the WEP key length 64 bit or 128 bit or 152 bit for encryption Disabled means this WEP key entry is invalid 64 bit You can enter 10 hexadecimal
226. matically gt Restore the router s settings to factory default system will reboot automatically 8 17 7 Password This page allows you to change the factory default user name and password of the router The username and password must not exceed 14 characters in length and must not include any spaces Old User Name Old Password New User Name New Password Confirm New Password Figure 8 92 Password It is recommended strongly that you change the factory default user name and password of the router All users who try to access the router s Web based utility or Quick Setup will be prompted amp Note The new user name and password must not exceed 14 characters in length and must not include any spaces Enter the new Password twice to confirm it Click the Save button when finished Click the Clear All button to clear all 257 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN e Eller To Mm o LL ioa 8 17 8 System Log This page allows you to query the logs of the router System Log Auto Mail Feature Disabled Mail Settings Log Type SHARING Log Level ALL Y index Tne a T Le oromon noni ear srarmg sente tagged Network sharing service started SHARING NOTICE SHARING NOTICE 1st day 00 06 23 SHARING NOTICE Network sharing service started 1st day 00 06 20 SHARING NOTICE Network sharing settings changed Time 2013 01 01 1 55 47 6948s H Ver WR7 10N v1 00000000 S
227. menu System Tools System Log and then you can view the logs of the Router System Log Auto Mail Feature Disabled Mail Settings Log Type SHARING Log Level ALL v CO ios Tie Jon Sd e raros sr none remera sens spp fsteevo00007 seaRING NOTCE Newer snamoseniesaes iS 3 1stday 00 08 06 SHARING NOTICE Network sharing settings changed 1st day 00 06 23 SHARING NOTICE Network sharing service started 1 tstday 00 06 20 SHARING NOTICE Network sharing settings changed Time 2013 01 01 1 55 47 6948s H Ver WR710N v1 00000000 S Ver 3 14 4 Build 130128 Rel 36510n L 192 168 0 254 M 255 255 255 0 W1 DHCP W 0 0 0 0 M 0 0 0 0 G 0 0 0 0 Mail Log Clear Log Previous Next CurrentNo 1 w Page Figure 6 38 System Log gt Refresh Refresh the page to show the latest log list gt Save Log Click to save all the logs in a txt file gt Mail Log Click to send an email of current logs manually according to the address and validation information set in Mail Settings The result will be shown in the later log soon gt Clear Log All the logs will be deleted from this device permanently not just from the page 163 TL WR710N MENTE IET TN Ve E Tae Mm o LL ioa Chapter 7 Configuration for Client Mode This chapter will show each Web page s key functions and the configuration way for Client Mode of TL WR710N 7 1 Login After your succe
228. mon Service Port Please Select Y Figure 4 66 Add or Modify an Access Target Entry Add or Modify an Access Target Entry Mode Domain Name Target Description Domain Name Figure 4 67 Add or Modify an Access Target Entry For example If you desire to restrict the internet activities of host with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 AA in the LAN to access www google com only you should first follow the settings below 1 Click Add New button in Figure 4 65 to enter the Add or Modify an Access Target Entry page In Mode field select Domain Name from the drop down list In Target Description field create a unique description for the target e g Target_1 In Domain Name field enter www google com a F wo DN Click Save to complete the settings 82 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o Lio Then you will go back to the Target Settings page and see the following list ID Target Description Information Modify 1 Target_1 www google com Edit Delete Add New Delete All Previous Next Current No 1 Page Figure 4 68 Target Settings 4 13 4 Schedule Choose menu Access Control Schedule you can view and set a Schedule list in the next screen as shown in Figure 4 69 The Schedule list is necessary for the Access Restriction Rule Schedule Settings ID Schedule Description Day Time Modify Add New Delete All
229. n appears Click OK to complete the WPS configuration Configuring the wireless network Successfully connected to the network by WPS The WPS Configuration Screen of Wireless Adapter Method Two Enter the PIN into my AP Step 1 For the configuration of the wireless adapter please choose Enter the PIN of this device into my access point or wireless router in the configuration utility of the WPS as below and click Connect 107 TL WR710N Eo EAA MIE TN Ve E Ltd To Mm o LL ioa Llao gt E 5 60 Status WPS Network Profile Advanced w This application will guide you through configuring your wireless network Please choose a method to join a wireless network Push the button on my access point or wireless router Enter the PIN of my access point or wireless router enter the PIN of this device into my access point or wireless router PIN 16952898 4 Connect The WPS Configuration Screen of Wireless Adapter GP Note In this example the default PIN code of this adapter is 16952898 as the above figure shown Step 2 Keep the WPS Status as Enabled and click the Add Device button in Figure 5 3 Step 3 Choose Enter the new device s PIN and enter the PIN code take 16952898 for example of the wireless adapter in the field after PIN as shown in the figure below Then click Connect Add A New Device O Enter the new device s PIN PIN 16952898 O Press the button of the new dev
230. n the Allowed Domain Name field e Select Schedule_1 you create just now from the Effective Time drop down list e In Status field select Enable 4 Click Save to complete the settings Then you will go back to the Parental Control Settings page and see the following list as shown in Figure 8 52 ID MAC address Website Description Schedule Status Modify 1 00 11 22 33 44 BB Allow Google Schedule_1 Edit Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Current No 1 w Page Figure 8 52 8 12 Access Control Access Control Figure 8 53 The Access Control menu There are four submenus under the Access Restriction menu as shown in Figure 8 53 Rule Host Target and Schedule Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 8 12 1 Rule Choose menu Access Control gt Rule you can view and set Access Restriction rules in the screen as shown in Figure 8 54 233 Vv Vv VV WV gt TL WR710N MENTE Te tte Man TN Ve AY Tare Mm o Lio Access Control Rule Management C Enable Internet Access Control Default Filter Policy Allow the packets specified by any enabled access control policy to pass through the Router Deny the packets specified by any enabled access control policy to pass through the Router Save ID Rule Name Host Target Schedule Status Modify Setup Wizard Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All j
231. n the DHCP server will be configured automatically while the Virtual Server and DMZ Host will not take effect until they are re configured 45 TL WR710N MENTE MIE AT e AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa 4 7 Wireless Wireless Wireless Security Wireless MAC Filtering Wireless Advanced Wireless Statistics Figure 4 18 Wireless menu There are five submenus under the Wireless menu shown in Figure 4 18 Wireless Settings Wireless Security Wireless MAC Filtering Wireless Advanced and Wireless Statistics Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 4 7 1 Wireless Settings Choose menu Wireless Wireless Settings and then you can configure the basic settings for the wireless network on this page Wireless Settings Wireless Network Name TP LINK_2046F2 Also called the SSID Region United States sv Warning Ensure you select a correct country to conform local law Incorrect settings may cause interference Mode 11bgn mixed 4 Channel Width Auto v Channel Auto v Enable Wireless Router Radio Enable SSID Broadcast C Enable WDS Bridging Save Figure 4 19 Wireless Settings Router gt Wireless Network Name Enter a string of up to 32 characters The same name of SSID Service Set Identification must be assigned to all wireless devices in your network The default SSID is set to be TP LINK_XXXXXX XXXXXX indicat
232. n the specified length 143 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa e WEP Key Password Select which of the four keys will be used and enter the matching WEP key that you create Make sure these values are identical on all wireless stations in your network e Key Type You can select the WEP key length 64 bit or 128 bit or 152 bit for encryption Disabled means this WEP key entry is invalid 64 bit You can enter 10 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 5 ASCII characters 128 bit You can enter 26 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 13 ASCII characters 152 bit You can enter 32 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 16 ASCII characters te Note If you do not set the key the wireless security function is still disabled even if you have selected Shared Key as Authentication Type 6 6 3 Wireless MAC Filtering Choose menu Wireless Wireless MAC Filtering and then you can control the wireless access by configuring the Wireless MAC Filtering function as shown in Figure 6 11 Wireless MAC Filtering Wireless MAC Filtering Enabled Filtering Rules Deny the stations specified by any enabled entries in the list to access O Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access ID MAC Address Status Description Modify Add New
233. n the wireless station s capability and request Encryption You can select Automatic TKIP or AES Radius Server IP Enter the IP address of the Radius server Radius Port Enter the port that Radius server used Radius Password Enter the password for the Radius server Group Key Update Period Specify the group key update interval in seconds The value should be 30 or above Enter 0 to disable the update WEP It is based on the IEEE 802 11 standard Type you can choose the type for the WEP security on the pull down list The default setting is Automatic which can select Shared Key or Open System authentication type automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request WEP Key Format Hexadecimal and ASCII formats are provided here Hexadecimal format stands for any combination of hexadecimal digits 0 9 a f A F in the specified length ASCII format stands for any combination of keyboard characters in the specified length WEP Key Password Select which of the four keys will be used and enter the matching WEP key that you create Make sure these values are identical on all wireless stations in your network Key Type You can select the WEP key length 64 bit or 128 bit or 152 bit for encryption Disabled means this WEP key entry is invalid 64 bit You can enter 10 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 5 ASCII characters 128 bit You can enter
234. nable button If disabled the function of DoS protection in Security settings will be ineffective gt Packets Statistics Interval The default value is 10 Select a value between 5 and 60 seconds in the pull down list The Packets Statistic interval indicates the time section of the packets statistic gt Sorted Rules Here displays sort as desired Statistics Table IP Address The IP Address displayed with statistics Packet The total amount of packets received and transmitted by the Total router Bytes The total amount of bytes received and transmitted by the router The total amount of packets received and transmitted in the last Packets Packets Statistic interval seconds The total amount of bytes received and transmitted in the last Bytes Packets Statistic interval seconds The total amount of the ICMP packets transmitted to WAN in the current ICMP Tx last Packets Statistic interval seconds The total amount of the UDP packets transmitted to WAN in the UDP Tx last Packets Statistic interval seconds The total amount of the TCP SYN packets transmitted to WAN in TOP SVN Ix the last Packets Statistic interval seconds Click the Save button to save the Packets Statistic interval value Click the Auto refresh checkbox to refresh automatically Click the Refresh button to refresh immediately 259 TL WR710N MENTE IET TN e Eller To Mm o LL ioa Appendix A FAQ 1
235. namic IP Address After the time is up the user will be automatically assigned a new dynamic IP address The range of the time is 1 2880 minutes The default value is 120 minutes gt Default Gateway Optional It is suggested to input the IP address of the LAN port of the Router The default value is 192 168 0 254 gt Default Domain Optional Input the domain name of your network gt Primary DNS Optional Input the DNS IP address provided by your ISP or consult your ISP Or consult your ISP gt Secondary DNS Optional Input the IP address of another DNS server if your ISP provides two DNS servers Note To use the DHCP server function of the Router you must configure all computers on the LAN as Obtain an IP Address automatically 4 8 2 DHCP Client List Choose menu DHCP DHCP Client List and then you can view the information about the clients attached to the Router in the screen as shown in Figure 4 30 DHCP Client List ID Client Name MAC Address Assigned IP Lease Time 1 tplink1 4129 6C 62 6D F7 31 8D 192 168 0 100 01 15 47 F Unknown 70 73 CB 1F C8 C9 192 168 0 101 01 56 32 Figure 4 30 DHCP Client List gt Client Name The name of the DHCP client gt MAC Address The MAC address of the DHCP client gt Assigned IP The IP address that the Router has allocated to the DHCP client gt Lease Time The time of the DHCP client leased After the dynamic IP address has expired
236. nd configure DMZ host in the screen as shown in Figure 8 43 The DMZ host feature allows one local host to be exposed to the Internet for a special purpose service such as Internet gaming or videoconferencing DMZ host forwards all the ports at the same time Any PC whose port is being forwarded must have its DHCP client function disabled and should have a new static IP Address assigned to it because its IP Address may be changed when using the DHCP function 224 TL WR710N MENTE MIE IT TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa DMZ Current DMZ Status Enable Disable DMZ Host IP Address 0 0 0 0 Figure 8 43 DMZ To assign a computer or server to be a DMZ server 1 Check the Enable radio button 2 Enter the IP Address of a local host in the DMZ Host IP Address field 3 Click the Save button Note After you set the DMZ host the firewall related to the host will not work 8 9 4 UPnP Choose menu Forwarding UPnP and then you can view the information about UPnP Universal Plug and Play in the screen as shown in Figure 8 44 The UPnP feature allows the devices such as Internet computers to access the local host resources or devices as needed UPnP devices can be automatically discovered by the UPnP service application on the LAN UPnP Current UPnP Status Enabled Current UPnP Settings List ID App Description External Port Protocol Internal Port IP Address Status Figure 8 44 UPnP gt Curre
237. nd you could configure the items on the ARP list also This page displays the ARP List it shows all the existing IP amp MAC Binding entries ARP List ID MAC Address IP Address Status Configure 1 6C 62 6D F7 31 8D 192 168 0 100 Unbound Load Delete 2 00 0A EB 00 07 BE 192 168 0 173 Bound Load Delete Bind All Load All Refresh Figure 8 80 ARP List gt MAC Address The MAC address of the controlled computer in the LAN gt IP Address The assigned IP address of the controlled computer in the LAN gt Status Enabled or Disabled of the MAC address and IP address binding gt Configure Load or delete item gt Load Load the item to the IP amp MAC Binding list gt Delete Delete the item 1 Click the Bind All button to bind all the current items available after enable Click the Load All button to load all items to the IP amp MAC Binding list Click the Refresh button to refresh all items cf Note An item could not be loaded to the IP amp MAC Binding list if the IP address of the item has been loaded before Error warning will prompt as well Likewise Load All only loads the items without interference to the IP amp MAC Binding list 8 16 Dynamic DNS The Router offers the DDNS Dynamic Domain Name System feature which allows the hosting of a website or e mail server with a fixed domain name named by yourself and a dynamic IP address and then your friends can connect to your serv
238. nding steps There are five operation modes supported by this router Wireless Router Access Point Repeater Client and WISP Client Router TL WR710N MENTE IET TN Ve E Ltd To Mm o LL ioa 2 3 1 Wireless Router Mode As a wireless router TL WR710N enables multi user to share Internet via DSL Cable Modem The default mode of TL WR710N is Wireless Router On this mode the wired port LAN WAN works as WAN it can be connected to DSL Modem or directly connected to a wired network with an Ethernet cable Computers could connect to the device by both wired way through the wired port LAN and wireless way Protected by NAT Firewall Wired Ethernet Connection Figure 2 1 Hardware Installation of the TL WR710N in Router Mode 1 Connect the LAN WAN port of TL WR710N to the LAN Port on the DSL Cable Modem 2 Connect the WAN port on the DSL Cable Modem to the wired Internet 3 Plug the power plug of TL WR710N in electrical wall socket 4 Power on the DSL Cable Modem PC s and notebook s 2 3 2 Access Point Mode As the supplement of wired LAN TL WR710N enables the wired LAN to connect to the Internet wirelessly Plug the power plug of TL WR710N in electrical wall socket and connect the Ethernet cable correctly you can surf the Internet by connecting your PC s to the Router wirelessly On this mode the wired port LAN WAN works as LAN Computer could connect to the device by either wired or wireless way The Pre encryption function is op
239. needs password you need to fill the password in this blank Local SSID Enter a value of up to 32 characters The same Name SSID must be assigned to all wireless devices in your network 25 gt gt click Connect in the corresponding row For example the third item is selected The target network s SSID will be automatically filled into the corresponding box which is shown as the TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa Wireless Security Mode You can configure the security settings of your wireless network Wireless Password Input the password of your Local SSID Click Survey button on the Wireless page as shown in Figure 3 20 and then AP List page will appear as shown in Figure 3 24 Find the SSID of the Access Point you want to access and Figure 3 20 Then click Next AP List AP Count 16 COI CSS COM ST GETTING CTI pereira ps e pone ene MIT firinne s DN ZETA 4 4c 60 DE 32 63 8 P LINK_18F710 3048 PA2 PSK B 14 E6 E4 E3 87 64 P LINK_TEST 1648 6 o PA2 PSK Back Refresh 4 The Finish page is shown as Figure 3 25 Click the Reboot button to make your wireless Figure 3 24 AP List configuration take effect and finish the Quick Setup Quick Setup Finish Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt WAN Connection Type gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish Congratulations This device is now connecting you to the Internet For detail settings please click other menus if ne
240. ng function immediately 228 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN e AYE Tare Mm o Lio gt Enable TCP SYN FLOOD Attack Filtering Enable or Disable the TCP SYN FLOOD Attack Filtering gt TCP SYN FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 The default value is 50 Enter a value between 5 3600 When the current TCP SYN FLOOD Packets numbers is beyond the set value the Router will startup the blocking function immediately gt Ignore Ping Packet From WAN Port Enable or Disable Ignore Ping Packet From WAN Port The default setting is disabled If enabled the ping packet from the Internet cannot access the Router gt Forbid Ping Packet From LAN Port Enable or Disable Forbid Ping Packet From LAN Port The default setting is disabled If enabled the ping packet from LAN cannot access the Router This function can be used to defend against some viruses Click the Save button to save the settings Click the Blocked DoS Host List button to display the DoS host table by blocking 8 10 3 Local Management Choose menu Security Local Management you can configure the management rule in the screen as shown in Figure 8 48 The management feature allows you to deny computers in LAN from accessing the Router Local Management Management Rules All the PCs on the LAN are allowed to access the Router s Web Based Utility Only the PCs listed can browse the built in web pages to perform Administrator tasks MAC 1 MAC 2
241. ngs 1D Host Description Information Modify Add New Delete A Previous Next Current No 4 v Page Figure 4 61 Host Settings gt Host Description Here displays the description of the host and this description is unique gt Information Here displays the information about the host It can be IP or MAC gt Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To add a new entry please follow the steps below 1 Click the Add New button 2 Inthe Mode field select IP Address or MAC Address e Ifyou select IP Address the screen shown is Figure 4 62 1 In Host Description field create a unique description for the host e g Host_1 79 TL WR710N MENTE IE TT Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa 2 In LAN IP Address field enter the IP address e If you select MAC Address the screen shown is Figure 4 63 1 In Host Description field create a unique description for the host e g Host_1 2 In MAC Address field enter the MAC address 3 Click the Save button to complete the settings Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table Click the Next button to go to the next page or click the Previous button return to the previous page Add or Modify a Host Entry Mode IP Address Sj Host Description LAN IP Address le Figure 4 62 Add or Modify a Host Entry Add or Modify a Host Entry Mode MAC Address Y Host Description MAC Address
242. ngs page e Working Mode The current wireless working mode in use e Wireless Name of Root AP The SSID of Root AP e Channel The current wireless channel in use e Mode The current wireless mode which the Router works on 137 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL io e Channel Width The current wireless channel width in use e MAC Address The physical address of the Router as seen from the WLAN gt Traffic Statistics The Router s traffic statistics e Received Bytes Traffic that counted in bytes has been received out from the WAN port e Received Packets Traffic that counted in packets has been received out from the WAN port Sent Bytes Traffic that counted in bytes has been sent out from the WAN port e Sent Packets Traffic that counted in packets has been sent out from the WAN port gt System Up Time The length of the time since the Router was last powered on or reset Click the Refresh button to get the latest status and settings of the Router 6 3 Quick Setup Please refer to Section 3 2 Quick Installation Guide 6 4 Working Mode The Router supports five operation mode types Wireless Router Access Point Repeater Client and Wireless Client Router Please select one you want Click Save to save your choice which is shown as Figure 5 7 Working Mode Wireless Router Enable multiple users to share Internet connection via ADSU Cable Modem O Access Point Transf
243. ns no Jpdate O WEP Type Autorratic y WEP Key Format Hexadecimal x Key Selecled WEP Key Key Type Key 1 Disabled Y key Disabled Y Key 3 Disabled v Key 4 Disabled Figure 6 9 Wireless Security gt Disable Security The wireless security function can be enabled or disabled If disabled the wireless stations will be able to connect the Router without encryption But it s strongly recommended to choose one of the following modes to enable security gt WPA PSK WPA2 Personal It s the WPA WPA2 authentication type based on pre shared passphrase e Version you can choose the version of the WPA PSK security on the drop down list The default setting is Automatic which can select WPA PSK Pre shared key of WPA or 142 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN e AYE Tale Mm o Lio WPA2 PSK Pre shared key of WPA automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e Encryption When WPA PSK or WPA is set as the Authentication Type you can select either Automatic or TKIP or AES as Encryption 5 Note If you check the WPA WPA2 Personal radio button and choose TKIP encryption you will find a notice in red as shown in Figure 6 10 WPA WPA2 Personal Recommended Version Automatic Recommended Encryption TKIP be Wireless Password You can enter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters between 8 and 64 Group Key Update Period D Seconds Keep
244. nt UPnP Status UPnP can be enabled or disabled by clicking the Enable or Disable button gt Current UPnP Settings List This table displays the current UPnP information e App Description The description provided by the application in the UPnP request e External Port The external port the Router opens for the application e Protocol The type of protocol the Router opens for the application e Internal Port The Internal port the Router opens for local host e IP Address The IP address of the UPnP device that is currently accessing the Router 225 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa e Status The status of the port is displayed here Enabled means that the port is still active Otherwise the port is inactive Click Refresh to update the Current UPnP Settings List 8 10Security Security Advanced Security Local Management Remote Management Figure 8 45 The Security menu There are four submenus under the Security menu as shown in Figure 8 45 Basic Security Advanced Security Local Management and Remote Management Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 8 10 1 Basic Security Choose menu Security Basic Security you can configure the basic security in the screen as shown in Figure 8 46 Basic Security Firewall SPI Firewall Enable Disable VPN PPTP Passthrough Enable Disable L2TP Passthrough Enab
245. nt or wireless router in the configuration utility of the WPS as below and click Connect Ll a 3 Status Network w This application will guide you through configuring your wireless network Please choose a method to join a wireless network Push the button on my access point or wireless router Enter the PIN of my access point or wireless router enter the PIN of this device into my access point or wireless router PIN 16952898 The WPS Configuration Screen of Wireless Adapter E Note In this example the default PIN code of this adapter is 16952898 as the above figure shown Step 2 Keep the WPS Status as Enabled and click the Add Device button in Figure 4 3 32 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN e AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa Step 3 Choose Enter the new device s PIN and enter the PIN code take 16952898 for example of the wireless adapter in the field after PIN as shown in the figure below Then click Connect Add A New Device O Enter the new device s PIN PIN 16952098 O Press the button of the new device in two minutes Figure 4 5 Add A New Device Method Three Enter the PIN from my AP Step 1 Get the Current PIN code of the AP in Figure 4 3 each AP has its unique PIN code Here takes the PIN code 12345670 of this AP for example Step 2 For the configuration of the wireless adapter please choose Enter the PIN of my access point or wireless router in the
246. ntrol Schedule you can view and set a Schedule list in the next screen as shown in Figure 8 65 The Schedule list is necessary for the Access Restriction Rule Schedule Settings ID Schedule Description Day Time Modify Add New Delete All Prevolus Next Current No 1 v Page Figure 8 65 Schedule Settings gt Schedule Description Here displays the description of the schedule and this description is unique gt Day Here displays the day s in a week gt Time Here displays the time period in a day gt Modify Here you can edit or delete an existing schedule To add a new schedule follow the steps below 1 Click Add New button shown in Figure 8 65 and the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 8 66 2 In Schedule Description field create a unique description for the schedule e g Schedule_1 wo In Day field select the day or days you need 4 In Time field you can select all day 24 hours or you may enter the Start Time and Stop Time in the corresponding field 5 Click Save to complete the settings Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table 240 TL WR710N 150Mbps Wireless N Mini Pocket Router Advanced Edition Click the Next button to go to the next page or click the Previous button return to the previous page Schedule Description Advance Schedule Settings Note The Schedule is based on the time ofthe Router D
247. nu There are three submenus under the DHCP menu shown in Figure 8 24 DHCP Settings DHCP Client List and Address Reservation Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 8 7 1 DHCP Settings Choose menu DHCP DHCP Settings and then you can configure the DHCP Server on the page as shown in Figure 8 25 The Router is set up by default as a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server which provides the TCP IP configuration for all the PC s that are connected to the Router in the LAN DHCP Server Disable Enable Start IP Address 192 168 0 100 EndIP Address 192 168 0 199 Address Lease Time 1120 minutes 1 2880 minutes the default value is 120 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 Optional Default Domain Optional Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Optional Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 i Optional Figure 8 25 DHCP Settings gt DHCP Server Enable or Disable the DHCP server If you disable the Server you must have another DHCP server within your network or else you must configure the computer manually 212 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa gt Start IP Address Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to start with when assigning IP addresses 192 168 0 100 is the default start address gt End IP Address Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to end with when assigning IP addresses 192 168 0 199 is the default end addres
248. o LL ioa WPA PSK WPA2 Personal It s the WPA WPA2 authentication type based on pre shared passphrase Version you can choose the version of the WPA PSK security on the drop down list The default setting is Automatic which can select WPA PSK Pre shared key of WPA or WPA2 PSK Pre shared key of WPA automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e Encryption When WPA PSK or WPA is set as the Authentication Type you can select either Automatic or TKIP or AES as Encryption amp Note If you check the WPA PSK WPA2 PSK radio button and choose TKIP encryption you will find a notice in red as shown in Figure 4 22 WPA WPA2 Personal Recommended Version Automatic Recommended Y Encryption TKIP b Wireless Password You can enter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters between 8 and 64 Group Key Update Period lo Seconds Keep it defaultifyou are not sure minimum is 30 0 means no update We do not recommend using the TKIP encryption ifthis device operates in 802 11n mode due to the fact that TKIP is not supported by 802 11n specification Figure 8 16 WPA WPA2 Enterprise It s based on Radius Server Version you can choose the version of the WPA security from the pull down list The default setting is Automatic which can select WPA Wi Fi Protected Access or WPA2 WPA version 2 automatically based on the wireless station s capabilit
249. o configure the corresponding function 6 6 1 Wireless Settings Choose menu Wireless Wireless Settings and then you can configure the basic settings for the wireless network on this page Wireless Settings Repeater Mode Universal Repeater OWDS Repeater Wireless Name of Root AP TP LINK_Network MAC Address of Root AP 94 0C 5D 2F 3C BE Region United States Ni Warning Ensure you select a correct country to conform local law ncorrect settings may cause interference Mode 4 1bgn mixed a Channel Width Auto Enable Wireless Radio Save Figure 6 7 Wireless Settings Repeater gt Repeater Mode In Repeater mode the wireless repeater relays signal between its stations and the root AP for greater wireless range e Universal Repeater In Repeater mode the AP with WDS disabled will relay data to an associated root AP AP function is enabled meanwhile e WDS Repeater In WDS Repeater mode the AP with WDS enabled will relay data to an associated root AP AP function is enabled meanwhile gt Wireless Name of Root AP The SSID of AP that you want to access 140 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AY Tare Mm o LL ioa gt MAC Address of Root AP The MAC address of AP that you want to access gt Survey Click this button you can search the AP which runs in the environment gt Region Select your region from the pull down list This field specifies the re
250. o to the media server configuration page 4 Click the Scan All button to scan all the share folders immediately You can also select the Auto scan at same time select an auto scan interval time by drop down list In this case the media server will auto scan the share folders tf Note The max share folders number is 6 If you want share a new folder when the number has been reached to be 6 you can delete a share folder and then add a new one 5 9 3 User Accounts You can specify the user name and password for Storage Sharing users on this page Storage Sharing users can use Internet Explorer to access files on the USB drive 127 TL WR710N MENTE MIE LT Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa There are two default user accounts that can access the Storage Sharing They are Administrator and Guest as shown in Figure 5 31 Administrator has read write access to Storage Sharing while Guest has read only access to Storage Sharing User Account Management Add New User User Name Password Storage Authority Modify admin admin Read and Write yes Edit guest guest Read Only no Edit Figure 5 31 User Account Management Only Administrator can use a Web browser to transfer the files from a PC to the Writable shared volume on the USB drive To add a new user account please follow the steps below 1 Click Add New User button and the screen will appear as shown in Figure 5 32 2 Self define a User Name 3 Enter the password in
251. of those specified in this field If your country or region is not listed please contact your local government agency for assistance 168 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN e E Tare Mm e Lio gt Enable Wireless Radio The wireless radio of the AP can be enabled or disabled to allow or deny wireless stations to access If enabled the wireless stations will be able to access the AP otherwise wireless stations will not be able to access the AP gt Survey Click this button you can search the APs E Note 1 The operating distance or range of your wireless connection varies significantly based on the physical placement of the Router For best results place your Router e Near the center of the area in which your wireless stations will operate e In an elevated location such as a high shelf e Away from the potential sources of interference such as PCs microwaves and cordless phones e Away from large metal surfaces 2 Failure to follow these guidelines can result in significant performance degradation or inability to wirelessly connect to the Router 7 6 2 Wireless Security Choose menu Wireless Wireless Security and then you can configure the security settings of your wireless network There are three wireless security modes supported by the Router WPA WPA2 Personal WPA WPA2 Enterprise and WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy 169 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AY Tare Mm o LL ioa Wireless S
252. og Statistics Figure 4 88 The System Tools menu There are nine submenus under the System Tools menu Time Settings Diagnostic Firmware Upgrade Factory Defaults Backup and Restore Reboot Password System Log and 94 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AY Tale Mm o LL ioa Statistics Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below 4 18 1 Time Settings You can set time manually or get GMT from the Internet for the router on this page Time Settings Time zone GMT 08 00 Beijing Hong Kong Perth Singapore i i Date 1 lo m3 moam Time 1 43 50 HHIMMISS NTP Server 1 0 0 0 0 Optional NTP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Optional C Enable Daylight Saving Start Mar 3rd Sun 2am End Nov 2nd Sun 3am Daylight Saving Status daylight saving is down Note Click the GET GMT to update the time from the internet with the pre defined servers or entering the customized server IP Address or Domain Name in the above frames Save Figure 4 89 Time Settings gt Time Zone Select your local time zone from this pull down list gt Date Enter your local date in MM DD YY into the right blanks gt Time Enter your local time in HH MM SS into the right blanks To set time manually follow the steps below Select your local time zone Enter the Date in
253. omatic Radio Data Rate 11g 54 48 36 24 18 12 9 6M Automatic 11b 11 5 5 2 1M Automatic gt Frequency Expansion DSSS Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Modulation DBPSK DQPSK CCK 16 QAM 64 QAM BPSK QPSK Security 64 128 152 bit WEP WPA WPA2 WPA2 PSK WPA PSK 135M 70dBm 10 PER 65M 73dBm 10 PER II Ren 54M 76dBm 10 PER 6M 92dBm 10 PER Mode Wireless Router Mode Access Point Mode Repeater Mode Client Mode WISP Client Router Mode Environmental and Physical Operating 0 40 32F 104F Temperature Storage 40 C 70 C 40 F 158 F Operating 10 90 RH Non condensing Humidity Storage 5 90 RH Non condensing 268 TL WR710N BRO To exe te TT ood k a a Cole C2 mC Ae TL To Mm Lo 14 Tola Appendix D Glossary 802 11n 802 11n builds upon previous 802 11 standards by adding MIMO multiple input multiple output MIMO uses multiple transmitter and receiver antennas to allow for increased data throughput via spatial multiplexing and increased range by exploiting the spatial diversity perhaps through coding schemes like Alamouti coding The Enhanced Wireless Consortium EWC 3 was formed to help accelerate the IEEE 802 11n development process and promote a technology specification for interoperability of next generation wireless local area networking WLAN products 802 11b The 802 11b standard specifies a wireless networking at 11 Mbps u
254. onding function 4 6 1 WAN Choose menu Network WAN and then you can configure the IP parameters of the WAN on the screen below 1 If your ISP provides the DHCP service please choose Dynamic IP type and the Router will automatically get IP parameters from your ISP You can see the page as follow Figure 4 9 WAN Connection Type Dynamic IP w IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Renew Release WAN port is unplugged MTU Size in bytes 1500 The defaultis 1500 do not change unless necessary O Use These DNS Servers Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 Optional Host Name TLWR710N O SetIP with Unicast DHCP lt is usually not required Save Figure 4 9 WAN Dynamic IP This page displays the WAN IP parameters assigned dynamically by your ISP including IP address Subnet Mask Default Gateway etc Click the Renew button to renew the IP parameters from your ISP Click the Release button to release the IP parameters 35 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o Lio gt MTU Size The normal MTU Maximum Transmission Unit value for most Ethernet networks is 1500 Bytes It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP gt Use These DNS Servers If your ISP gives you one or two DNS addresses select Use These DNS Servers and enter the primary and secondary addresses into the c
255. onding function 8 13 1 Static Routing List Choose menu Static Routing and you can configure the static route in the next screen shown in Figure 8 69 A static route is a pre determined path that network information must travel to reach a specific host or network Static Routing 1D Destination Network Subnet Mask Default Gateway Status Modify Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure 8 69 Static Routing To add static routing entries follow the steps below 1 Click Add New shown in Figure 8 69 you will see the following screen Figure 8 70 Destination Network Subnet Mask Default Gateway Status Enabled w Figure 8 70 Add or Modify a Static Route Entry 2 Enter the following data gt Destination Network The Destination IP Address is the address of the network or host that you want to assign to a static route 242 TL WR710N RENTES TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o Lio gt Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask determines which portion of an IP Address is the network portion and which portion is the host portion gt Default Gateway This is the IP Address of the gateway device that allows for contact between the Router and the network or host 3 Select Enabled or Disabled for this entry on the Status drop down list 4 Click the Save button to make the entry take effect Click the Delete button to delete the entry Click the Ena
256. op button to stop the Network Sharing service Click the Eject Disk button to safely remove the USB storage device that is connected to USB port This takes the drive offline A message as shown in Figure 5 26 will appear on your web browser when it is safe to detach the USB disk Message from webpage O This operation will disable Media Server Are you sure to continue Figure 5 26 Safe Unplug Message 124 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o Lio Click the Rescan button to start a new scan Follow the instructions below to set up your router as a file server 1 Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router Click the Rescan button to find the USB drive that has been attached to the router Click the Start button to start the Storage Sharing service A WY N Click the Enable button under Shared to enable the disk to share 5 Click the Open the disk to visit the sharing disk E Note 1 The router can automatically locate new USB drive But to display the information about your USB device you need to click the Rescan button manually The new settings will not take effect until you restart the service To unplug the USB drive click Eject Disk button first Simply pulling USB drive out of the USB port can cause damage to the device and loss of data 4 Mounted volumes of each USB port are subject to the 8 volume limit So you cannot access more than 8 volumes on the USB
257. or delete an existing entry To setup a virtual server entry 1 Click the Add New button the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 4 44 2 Select the service port you want to use from the Common Service Port list If the Common Service Port list does not have the service that you want to use type the service port number or service port range in the Service Port box 3 Type the IP Address of the computer in the IP Address box 64 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa 4 Select the protocol used for this application either TCP UDP or All 5 Select the Enabled to enable the virtual server 6 Click the Save button Add or Modify a Virtual Server Entry Service Port COAX OF XX Internal Port XX Only valid for single Service Port or leave it blank IP Address Protocol All he Status Enabled Nj Common Service Port Select One v Figure 4 44 Add or Modify a Virtual Server Entry E Note If your computer or server has more than one type of available service please select another service and enter the same IP Address for that computer or server To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify the information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable Disable All button to make all entries enabled disabled Click the Delete All button to delet
258. orage Sharing users on this page Storage Sharing users can use Internet Explorer to access files on the USB drive There are two default user accounts that can access the Storage Sharing They are Administrator and Guest as shown in Figure 4 40 Administrator has read write access to Storage Sharing while Guest has read only access to Storage Sharing User Account Management Add New User User Name Password Storage Authority Modify admin admin Read and Write yes Edit guest guest Read Only no Edit Figure 4 40 User Account Management Only Administrator can use a Web browser to transfer the files from a PC to the Writable shared volume on the USB drive To add a new user account please follow the steps below 1 Click Add New User button and the screen will appear as shown in Figure 4 41 2 Self define a User Name 3 Enter the password in the Password field 4 Choose the Storage Authority from the drop down list Read and Write or Read Only 62 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa Add or Modify User Account User Name admin2 Password admin Storage Authority Read and Write v save J _ bak Figure 4 41 Add or Modify User Account gt User Name Type the user name that you want to give access to the USB drive The user name must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length gt Password Enter the password in the Password
259. orm your existing wired network to a wireless network Repeater Extend your existing wireless coverage by relaying wireless signal Client Acting as a Wireless Adapter to connect your wired devices e g XbowPS3 to a wireless network WISP Client Router Enable multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP Save Figure 6 3 Working Mode gt Wireless Router The wireless Router Mode In this mode the device enables multi user to share Internet via DSL Cable Modem The only wired port works as WAN gt Access Point The wireless access point mode gt Repeater The wireless Repeater Mode It could extend the range of wireless network gt Client The Client Mode The computer connected by Ethernet could get access to an AP by Client mode 138 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve E Ltd To Mm o LL ioa gt WISP Client Router In this mode the device enables multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP 6 5 Network Figure 6 4 the Network menu There is only one submenu under the Network menu shown in Figure 6 4 LAN 6 5 1 LAN Choose menu Network LAN and then you can configure the IP parameters of the LAN on the screen as below LAN MAC Address 00 1D 0F 01 06 28 Type Smart IP DHCP IP Address 192 168 0 254 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 IGMP Proxy Enable Y Note IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol works for IPT multicast stream The devic
260. orrect fields Otherwise the DNS servers will be assigned dynamically from your ISP Note If you find error when you go to a website after entering the DNS addresses it is likely that your DNS servers are set up improperly You should contact your ISP to get DNS server addresses gt Host Name This option specifies the Host Name of the Router gt Get IP with Unicast DHCP A few ISPs DHCP servers do not support the broadcast applications If you cannot get the IP Address normally you can choose this option It is rarely required Click the Save button to save your settings If your ISP provides a static or fixed IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway and DNS setting select Static IP The Static IP settings page will appear as shown in Figure 4 10 WAN Connection Type Static IP x IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 MTU Size in bytes 1500 The default is 1500 do not change unless necessary Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 Optional Figure 4 10 WAN Static IP gt IP Address Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation provided by your ISP gt Subnet Mask Enter the subnet Mask in dotted decimal notation provided by your ISP usually is 255 255 255 0 gt Default Gateway Enter the gateway IP address in dotted decimal notation provided by your ISP 36 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN e E Tare Mm o LL ioa gt MTU Si
261. ory default value 44 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o Lio Click the Save button to save your settings E Note 1 Only the PC on your LAN can use the MAC Address Clone function 2 If you change WAN MAC Address when the WAN connection is PPPoE it will not take effect until the connection is re established 4 6 3 LAN Choose menu Network LAN and then you can configure the IP parameters of the LAN on the screen as below LAN MAC Address D0 1D 0F 01 06 28 IP Address 192 168 0 254 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 v IGMP Proxy Enable v Note IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol works for IPTY multicast stream The device supports both IGMP proxy with enabled or disable option and IGMP snooping Figure 4 17 LAN gt MAC Address The physical address of the LAN ports as seen from the LAN The value can t be changed gt IP Address Enter the IP address of your Router in dotted decimal notation factory default 192 168 0 254 gt Subnet Mask An address code that determines the size of the network Normally use 255 255 255 0 as the subnet mask gt IGMP Proxy The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP feature allows your devices in LAN can watch TV ce Note 1 If you change the IP Address of LAN you must use the new IP Address to login to the Router 2 Ifthe new LAN IP Address you set is not in the same subnet with the previous one the IP Address pool i
262. ovides an extra Connection type such as Dynamic Static IP to connect to a local area network then you can check the radio button of Dynamic Static IP to activate this secondary connection e Disabled The Secondary Connection is disabled by default so there is PPPoE connection only This is recommended 37 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa e Dynamic IP You can check this radio button to use Dynamic IP as the secondary connection to connect to the local area network provided by ISP e Static IP You can check this radio button to use Static IP as the secondary connection to connect to the local area network provided by ISP Connect on Demand In this mode the Internet connection can be terminated automatically after a specified inactivity period Max Idle Time and be re established when you attempt to access the Internet again If you want your Internet connection keeps active all the time please enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet access disconnects Connect Automatically The connection can be re established automatically when it was down Time based Connecting The connection will only be established in the period from the start time to the end time both are in HH MM format Note Only when you have configured the system time on System Tools Time page will the Time based Connecting f
263. please follow the steps below 1 Click the Add New button and the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 8 50 2 Enter the MAC address of the PC e g 00 11 22 33 44 AA you d like to control in the MAC Address of Child PC field Or you can choose the MAC address from the All Address in Current LAN drop down list 3 Give a description e g Allow Google for the website allowed to be accessed in the Website Description field 231 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AY Tare Mm o Lio 4 Enter the allowed domain name of the website either the full name or the keywords e g google in the Allowed Domain Name field Any domain name with keywords in it e g www google com will be allowed 5 Select from the Effective Time drop down list the schedule e g Schedule _1 you want the entry to take effect If there are not suitable schedules for you click the Schedule in red below to go to the Advance Schedule Settings page and create the schedule you need 6 Inthe Status field you can select Enabled or Disabled to enable or disable your entry 7 Click the Save button Click the Enable All button to enable all the rules in the list Click the Disable All button to disable all the rules in the list Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table Click the Next button to go to the next page or click the Previous button return to the previous page Add or Modify Parental Control Entry The Schedule is
264. protocols for ensuring private secure communications over Internet Protocol IP networks through the use of cryptographic security services To allow IPSec tunnels to pass through the Router keep the default Enabled gt ALG It is recommended to enable Application Layer Gateway ALG because ALG allows customized Network Address Translation NAT traversal filters to be plugged into the gateway to support address and port translation for certain application layer control data protocols such as FTP TFTP H323 etc e FTP ALG To allow FTP clients and servers to transfer data across NAT keep the default Enable e TFTP ALG To allow TFTP clients and servers to transfer data across NAT keep the default Enable e H323 ALG To allow Microsoft NetMeeting clients to communicate across NAT keep the default Enable Click the Save button to save your settings 8 10 2 Advanced Security Choose menu Security Advanced Security you can protect the Router from being attacked by TCP SYN Flood UDP Flood and ICMP Flood in the screen as shown in Figure 8 47 227 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve Elle To fm o LL ioa Advanced Security Packets Statistics Interval 5 60 10 v Seconds DoS Protection Disable Enable Enable ICMP FLOOD Attack Filtering ICMP FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 s Packets Secs Enable UDP FLOOD Filtering UDP FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 500 Packets Secs Enable TCP S
265. re are four submenus under the Forwarding menu shown in Figure 8 38 Virtual Servers Port Triggering DMZ and UPnP Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 8 9 1 Virtual Servers Choose menu Forwarding Virtual Servers and then you can view and add virtual servers in the screen as shown in Figure 8 39 Virtual servers can be used for setting up public services on your LAN such as DNS Email and FTP A virtual server is defined as a service port and all requests from the Internet to this service port will be redirected to the computer specified by the server IP Any PC that was used for a virtual server must have a static or reserved IP Address because its IP Address may be changed when using the DHCP function Virtual Servers ID Service Port Internal Port IP Address Protocol Status Modify Add New Enable Al Disable All Delete A Previous Next Figure 8 39 Virtual Servers gt Service Port The numbers of External Ports You can type a service port or a range of service ports in XXX YYY format XXX is the start port number YYY is the end port number gt Internal Port The Internal Service Port number of the PC running the service application You can leave it blank if the Internal Port is the same as the Service Port or enter a specific port number when Service Port is a single one gt IP Address The IP Address of the PC providing the service applicat
266. re are two default user accounts that can access the Storage Sharing They are Administrator and Guest as shown in Figure 7 23 Administrator has read write access to Storage Sharing while Guest has read only access to Storage Sharing User Account Management Add New User User Name Password Storage Authority Modify admin admin Read and Write yes Edit guest guest Read Only no Edit Figure 7 23 User Account Management Only Administrator can use a Web browser to transfer the files from a PC to the Writable shared volume on the USB drive To add a new user account please follow the steps below 1 Click Add New User button and the screen will appear as shown in Figure 7 23 2 Self define a User Name 3 Enter the password in the Password field 4 Choose the Storage Authority from the drop down list Read and Write or Read Only Add or Modify User Account User Name admin2 Password admin Storage Authority Read and Write v Figure 7 24 Add or Modify User Account gt User Name Type the user name that you want to give access to the USB drive The user name must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length gt Password Enter the password in the Password field The password must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length For security purposes the password for each user account is not displayed 180 TL WR710N MENDIET
267. remain active at all times enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number in minutes that you wish to have the Internet connecting last unless a new link is requested Caution Sometimes the connection cannot be disconnected although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background Click the Save button to save your settings 8 5 2 MAC Clone Choose menu Network MAC Clone and then you can configure the WAN MAC address on the screen below as shown in Figure 8 12 WAN MAC Address 00 1D 0F 01 06 29 Restore Factory MAC Your PC s MAC Address 6C 62 6D F7 31 8D Clone MAC Address Figure 8 12 MAC Address Clone Some ISPs require that you register the MAC Address of your adapter Changes are rarely needed here gt WAN MAC Address This field displays the current MAC address of the WAN port If your ISP requires you to register the MAC address please enter the correct MAC address into this field in XX XX XX XX XX XX format X is any hexadecimal digit gt Your PC s MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the PC that is managing the Router If the MAC address is required you can click the Clone MAC Address To button and this MAC address will fill in the WAN MAC Address field Click Restore Factory MAC to restore the MAC address of WAN port to the factory default value 201 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN V
268. roadcast and multicast messages When the Router has buffered broadcast or multicast 118 TL WR710N MENTE ME TN e AYE Tale Mm o Lio messages for associated clients it sends the next DTIM with a DTIM Interval value You can specify the value between 1 255 Beacon Intervals The default value is 1 which indicates the DTIM Interval is the same as Beacon Interval gt Enable WMM WMM function can guarantee the packets with high priority messages being transmitted preferentially It is strongly recommended enabled gt Enable Short GI This function is recommended for it will increase the data capacity by reducing the guard interval time gt Enable AP Isolation This function isolate all connected wireless stations so that wireless stations cannot access each other through WLAN This function will be disabled if WDS Bridge is enabled c Note If you are not familiar with the setting items in this page it s strongly recommended to keep the provided default values otherwise it may result in lower wireless network performance 5 7 5 Wireless Statistics Choose menu Wireless Wireless Statistics and then you can see the MAC Address Current Status Received Packets and Sent Packets for each connected wireless station gt gt Wireless Statistics Current Connected Wireless Stations numbers 1 ID MAC Address Current Status Received Packets Sent Packets Configure 1 70 73 CB 1F C8 C9 STA ASSOC 46 16
269. roo Previous Next Current No 11 y Page Figure 8 54 Access Control Rule Management Enable Internet Access Restriction Select the check box to enable the Internet Access Restriction function so the Default Filter Policy can take effect Rule Name Here displays the name of the rule and this name is unique Host Here displays the host selected in the corresponding rule Target Here displays the target selected in the corresponding rule Schedule Here displays the schedule selected in the corresponding rule Action Here displays the action the Router takes to deal with the packets It could be Allow or Deny Allow means that the Router permits the packets to go through the Router Deny means that the Router rejects the packets to go through the Router Status This field displays the status of the rule Enabled means the rule will take effect Disabled means the rule will not take effect Modify Here you can edit or delete an existing rule To add a new rule please follow the steps below 1 2 3 4 Click the Add New button and the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 8 54 Give a name e g Rule_1 for the rule in the Rule Name field Select a host from the Host drop down list or choose Click Here To Add New Host List Select a target from the Target drop sown list or choose Click Here To Add New Target List Select a schedule from the Schedule drop down list or choose Click
270. route Max TTL 20 1 30 Diagnostic Results This device is ready Figure 8 86 Diagnostic Tools gt Diagnostic Tool Check the radio button to select one diagnostic too e Ping This diagnostic tool troubleshoots connectivity reachability and name resolution to a given host or gateway e Traceroute This diagnostic tool tests the performance of a connection Note You can use ping traceroute to test both numeric IP address or domain name If pinging tracerouting the IP address is successful but pinging tracerouting the domain name is not you might have a name resolution problem In this case ensure that the domain name you are specifying can be resolved by using Domain Name System DNS queries gt IP Address Domain Name Type the destination IP address such as 202 108 22 5 or Domain name such as www baidu com Pings Count The number of Ping packets for a Ping connection gt Ping Packet Size The size of Ping packet 253 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o Lio gt Ping Timeout Set the waiting time for the reply of each Ping packet If there is no reply in the specified time the connection is overtime gt Traceroute Max TTL The max number of hops for a Traceroute connection Click Start to check the connectivity of the Internet The Diagnostic Results page displays the result of diagnosis If the result is similar to the following screen the connectivity of th
271. rrent status started or stopped You can click the Start button to start the Media Server and click the Stop button to stop it gt Name The display name of this folder gt File System The file system type on the partition can be FAT32 or NTFS gt Folder The real full path of the specified folder 177 TL WR710N 150Mbps Wireless N Mini Pocket Router Advanced Edition gt Delete You can delete the share folder by click Delete To set up your media server please follow the instructions below 1 Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router and then the screen will appear as shown in Figure 7 20 Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Stopped Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 7 20 Media Server Setting 2 Click the Start button to start the media server and then the screen will appear as shown in Figure 7 21 Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Started E Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 7 21 Media Server Setting 3 Click the Add share folder button to specify a folder as the search path of media server The screen will then appear as shown in Figure 7 22 178 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa Add New Folder Display Name video
272. rs Cf Note If you do not set the key the wireless security function is still disabled even if you have selected Shared Key as Authentication Type 7 7 DHCP DHCP Client List Address Reservation Figure 7 10 The DHCP menu There are three submenus under the DHCP menu shown in Figure 7 10 DHCP Settings DHCP Client List and Address Reservation Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 7 7 1 DHCP Settings Choose menu DHCP DHCP Settings and then you can configure the DHCP Server on the page as shown in Figure 7 11 The Router is set up by default as a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server which provides the TCP IP configuration for all the PC s that are connected to the Router in the LAN DHCP Settings DHCP Server Disable Enable Start IP Address 192 168 0 100 End IP Address 192 168 0 199 Address Lease Time 120 minutes 1 2880 minutes the default value is 120 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 optional Default Domain optional Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 optional Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 optional Figure 7 11 DHCP Settings gt DHCP Server Enable or Disable the DHCP server If you disable the Server you must have another DHCP server within your network or else you must configure the computer manually 172 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa gt Start IP Addres
273. rver The screen will then appear as shown in Figure 4 39 Add New Folder Display Name video Partition C Share entire partition Folder Location imy share Select Folder O photo video Figure 4 39 Add New Folder gt Display Name You can enter a display name for the share folder gt Share entire partition Choose this option and then the folders contained in this partition will all be shared gt Folder Location Displays the location of this folder gt Select Check the radio button to select the folder to share gt Folder Displays folders that are in current path gt Upper Click this button to get into the upper folder gt Save Click this button to save your settings and the page will be redirected to the media server configuration page 61 TL WR710N MENTE IET TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa gt Back Click this button to discard the settings and just go to the media server configuration page 4 Click the Scan All button to scan all the share folders immediately You can also select the Auto scan at same time select an auto scan interval time by drop down list In this case the media server will auto scan the share folders cf Note The max share folders number is 6 If you want share a new folder when the number has been reached to be 6 you can delete a share folder and then add a new one 4 9 3 User Accounts You can specify the user name and password for St
274. rver that allows you to share stored content with other computers and devices on your home network and on the Internet Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Stopped Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 8 32 Media Server Setting gt Server Name The name of this Media Server gt Server Status Indicates the Media Server s current status started or stopped You can click the Start button to start the Media Server and click the Stop button to stop it gt Name The display name of this folder gt File System The file system type on the partition can be FAT32 or NTFS gt Folder The real full path of the specified folder gt Delete You can delete the share folder by click Delete To set up your media server please follow the instructions below 1 Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router and then the screen will appear as shown in Figure 8 33 Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Stopped Auto scan every 2 hours scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 8 33 Media Server Setting 217 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AY Tae Mm o Lio 2 Click the Start button to start the media server and then the screen will appear as shown in Figure 8 34 Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status
275. rvice Name AC Name The service name and AC Access Concentrator name should not be configured unless you are sure it is necessary for your ISP In most cases leaving these fields blank will work gt ISP Specified IP Address If your ISP does not automatically assign IP addresses to the Router during login please click Use IP address specified by ISP check box and enter the IP address provided by your ISP in dotted decimal notation gt Detect Online Interval The Router will detect Access Concentrator online at every interval The default value is 0 You can input the value between 0 and 120 The value 0 means no detect gt Primary DNS Secondary DNS If your ISP does not automatically assign DNS addresses to the Router during login please click Use the following DNS servers check box and enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation of your ISP s primary DNS server If a secondary DNS server address is available enter it as well Click the Save button to save your settings If your ISP provides BigPond Cable connection please select BigPond Cable option Then you should enter the following parameters Figure 8 9 196 TL WR710N Eo AAA KIE TN Ve AYE Tare B o Lite WAN Connection Type BigPond Cable Y User Name username Password Auth Server sm server Auth Domain MTU Size in bytes 11500 The default is 1500 do not
276. ry please follow the steps below 1 2 Click the Add New button In Mode field select IP Address or Domain Name e Ifyou select IP Address the screen shown is Figure 4 66 1 In Target Description field create a unique description for the target e g Target_1 2 In IP Address field enter the IP address of the target 3 Select a common service from Common Service Port drop down list so that the Target Port will be automatically filled If the Common Service Port drop down list doesn t have the service you want specify the Target Port manually 4 In Protocol field select TCP UDP ICMP or ALL e If you select Domain Name the screen shown is Figure 4 67 1 In Target Description field create a unique description for the target e g Target_1 81 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN e E Tale Mm o LL ioa 2 In Domain Name field enter the domain name either the full name or the keywords for example Google in the blank Any domain name with keywords in it e g www google com will be blocked or allowed You can enter 4 domain names 3 Click the Save button Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table Click the Next button to go to the next page or click the Previous button return to the previous page Add or Modify an Access Target Entry Mode IP Address lt j Target Description IP Address Target Port gt Protocol All v Com
277. s gt Address Lease Time The Address Lease Time is the amount of time a network user will be allowed connection to the Router with their current dynamic IP Address Enter the amount of time in minutes and the user will be leased this dynamic IP Address After the time is up the user will be automatically assigned a new dynamic IP address The range of the time is 1 2880 minutes The default value is 120 minutes gt Default Gateway Optional It is suggested to input the IP address of the LAN port of the Router The default value is 192 168 0 254 gt Default Domain Optional Input the domain name of your network gt Primary DNS Optional Input the DNS IP address provided by your ISP or consult your ISP Or consult your ISP gt Secondary DNS Optional Input the IP address of another DNS server if your ISP provides two DNS servers Note To use the DHCP server function of the Router you must configure all computers on the LAN as Obtain an IP Address automatically 8 7 2 DHCP Client List Choose menu DHCP DHCP Client List and then you can view the information about the clients attached to the Router in the screen as shown in Figure 8 26 DHCP Client List ID Client Name MAC Address Assigned IP Lease Time 1 tplink1 4129 6C 62 6D F7 31 8D 192 168 0 100 01 15 47 F Unknown 70 73 CB 1F C8 C9 192 168 0 101 01 56 32 Figure 8 26 DHCP Client List gt Client Name The name of the DHC
278. s IP address or the domain name If you choose static IP and enter the domain name you should also enter the DNS assigned by your ISP And click the Save button Click the Connect button to connect immediately Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately gt Connect on Demand You can configure the Router to disconnect from your Internet connection after a specified period of inactivity Max Idle Time If your Internet connection has been terminated due to inactivity Connect on Demand enables the Router to automatically re establish your connection as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again If you wish to activate Connect on Demand check the radio button If you want your Internet connection to remain active at all times enter 0 in the Max 2432 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet connection terminates gt Connect Automatically Connect automatically after the Router is disconnected To use this option check the radio button gt Connect Manually You can configure the Router to make it connect or disconnect manually After a specified period of inactivity Max Idle Time the Router will disconnect from your Internet connection and you will not be able to re establish your connection automatically as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again To use this option cl
279. s Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to start with when assigning IP addresses 192 168 0 100 is the default start address gt End IP Address Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to end with when assigning IP addresses 192 168 0 199 is the default end address gt Address Lease Time The Address Lease Time is the amount of time a network user will be allowed connection to the Router with their current dynamic IP Address Enter the amount of time in minutes and the user will be leased this dynamic IP Address After the time is up the user will be automatically assigned a new dynamic IP address The range of the time is 1 2880 minutes The default value is 120 minutes gt Default Gateway Optional It is suggested to input the IP address of the LAN port of the Router The default value is 192 168 0 254 gt Default Domain Optional Input the domain name of your network gt Primary DNS Optional Input the DNS IP address provided by your ISP or consult your ISP gt Secondary DNS Optional Input the IP address of another DNS server if your ISP provides two DNS servers E Note 1 Touse the DHCP server function of the Router you must configure all computers on the LAN as Obtain an IP Address automatically This function will take effect until this device reboots 2 When you choose the Smart IP DHCP mode in Network LAN the DHCP Server function will be disabled You will see the page as be
280. s The LAN IP address of the Router e Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with LAN IP address Wireless This field displays basic information or status for wireless function you can configure them in the Wireless gt Wireless Settings page e Working Mode The current wireless working mode in use e Wireless Name of Root AP The SSID of Root AP e Channel The current wireless channel in use e Mode The current wireless mode which the Router works on 165 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL io e Channel Width The current wireless channel width in use e MAC Address The physical address of the Router as seen from the WLAN gt Traffic Statistics The Router s traffic statistics e Received Bytes Traffic that counted in bytes has been received out from the WAN port e Received Packets Traffic that counted in packets has been received out from the WAN port Sent Bytes Traffic that counted in bytes has been sent out from the WAN port e Sent Packets Traffic that counted in packets has been sent out from the WAN port gt System Up Time The length of the time since the Router was last powered on or reset Click the Refresh button to get the latest status and settings of the Router 7 3 Quick Setup Please refer to Section 3 2 Quick Installation Guide 7 4 Working Mode The Router supports five operation mode types Wireless Router Access Point Repeater Client and Wireless Cli
281. s N Mini Pocket Router WR710N requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection admin v Remember my credentials Figure 3 3 Login Windows EP Note If the above screen does not pop up it means that your Web browser has been set to a proxy Go to Tools menu gt Internet Options gt Connections gt LAN Settings in the screen that appears cancel the Using Proxy checkbox and click OK to finish it 2 After a successful login you can click the Quick Setup menu to quickly configure your Router The quick setup will tell you how to configure the basic network parameters To continue please click the Next button To exit please click the Exit button Ned Figure 3 4 Quick Setup 3 Click Next and then Working Mode page will appear shown in Figure 3 5 13 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AY Tare Mm o LL ioa Working Mode Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt WAN Connection Type gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish Wireless Router Access Point Repeater Client 00000 WISP Client Router Next Figure 3 5 Quick Setup Working Mode E Note The Router supports five working modes for multi user to access the Internet Wireless Router Access Point Repeater Client and WISP Client Router In Wireless Router mode the device enables multiple users to share the Intern
282. se Time is the amount of time a network user will be allowed connection to the Router with their current dynamic IP Address Enter the amount of time in minutes and the user will be leased this dynamic IP Address After the time is up the user will be automatically assigned a new dynamic IP address The range of the time is 1 2880 minutes The default value is 120 minutes Default Gateway Optional It is suggested to input the IP address of the LAN port of the Router The default value is 192 168 0 254 Default Domain Optional Input the domain name of your network Primary DNS Optional Input the DNS IP address provided by your ISP or consult your ISP Secondary DNS Optional Input the IP address of another DNS server if your ISP provides two DNS servers Note To use the DHCP server function of the Router you must configure all computers on the LAN as Obtain an IP Address automatically When you choose the Smart IP DHCP mode in Network LAN the DHCP Server function will be disabled You will see the page as below 149 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN e AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa DHCP Settings DHCP Server Disable Enable Start IP Address 192 168 0 100 End IP Address Address Lease Time 2880 minutes the default value is 120 Default Gateway 192 168 0254 Optional Default Domain Po Optional Primary DNS 192 168 0 254 Optional Secondary DNS 68 0 254 Optional Note
283. se the new IP Address to login to the Router 2 If the new LAN IP Address you set is not in the same subnet with the previous one the IP Address pool in the DHCP server will be configured automatically while the Virtual Server and DMZ Host will not take effect until they are re configured 3 When you choose the Smart IP DHCP mode the DHCP Server function will be disabled 5 7 Wireless Wireless Wireless Security Wireless MAC Filtering Wireless Advanced Wireless Statistics Figure 5 10 Wireless menu 111 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve E Tare Mm o LL ioa There are five submenus under the Wireless menu shown in Figure 5 10 Wireless Settings Wireless Security Wireless MAC Filtering Wireless Advanced and Wireless Statistics Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 5 7 1 Wireless Settings Choose menu Wireless Wireless Settings and then you can configure the basic settings for the wireless network on this page Wireless Settings Wireless Network Name TP LINK_2046F2 Also called the SSID Region United States Y Warning Ensure you select a correct country to conform local law Incorrect settings may cause interference Channel Auto v Mode 11bgn mixed J Channel Width Auto v Enable Wireless Radio Enable SSID Broadcast Save Figure 5 11 Wireless Settings AP gt Wireless Network Name Enter a string of up
284. sed space and free space on this page as shown below Storage Sharing Service Status Started O Access shared storage with password Volume Capacity Used Free Use Shared volume 1 96B 1 36B 626 MB 67 Eject Disk Rescan Figure 8 30 Storage Sharing gt Service Status Indicates the Network Sharing service s current status You can click the Start button to start the Storage Sharing service and click the Stop button to stop it 215 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa gt Volume The volume name of the USB drive the users have access to Volume 1 8 is mapping to USB port1 and Volume 9 16 is mapping to USB port2 gt Capacity The storage capacity of the USB driver gt Used The used space of the USB driver gt Free The available space of the USB driver gt Use The percentage of the used space gt Shared Indicates the shared or non shared status of the volume When the volume is shared you can click the Disable to stop sharing the volume when volume is non shared you can click the Enable button to share the volume Click the Start button to start the Network Sharing service Click the Stop button to stop the Network Sharing service Click the Eject Disk button to safely remove the USB storage device that is connected to USB port This takes the drive offline A message as shown in Figure 8 31 will appear on your web browser when it is safe to detach the USB disk
285. sing direct sequence spread spectrum DSSS technology and operating in the unlicensed radio spectrum at 2 4GHz and WEP encryption for security 802 11b networks are also referred to as Wi Fi networks 802 11g specification for wireless networking at 54 Mbps using direct sequence spread spectrum DSSS technology using OFDM modulation and operating in the unlicensed radio spectrum at 2 4GHz and backward compatibility with IEEE 802 11b devices and WEP encryption for security DDNS Dynamic Domain Name System The capability of assigning a fixed host and domain name to a dynamic Internet IP Address DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol A protocol that automatically configure the TCP IP parameters for the all the PC s that are connected to a DHCP server DMZ Demilitarized Zone A Demilitarized Zone allows one local host to be exposed to the Internet for a special purpose service such as Internet gaming or videoconferencing DNS Domain Name System An Internet Service that translates the names of websites into IP addresses Domain Name A descriptive name for an address or group of addresses on the Internet DSL Digital Subscriber Line A technology that allows data to be sent or received over existing traditional phone lines ISP Internet Service Provider A company that provides access to the Internet MTU Maximum Transmission Unit The size in bytes of the largest packet that can be transmitted NAT
286. ss The MAC address of the PC for which you want to reserve an IP address gt Reserved IP Address The IP address reserved for the PC by the Router gt Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled gt Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To Reserve an IP address 1 Click the Add New button Then Figure 5 23 will pop up 122 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve Eller To Mm o LL ioa 2 Enter the MAC address in XX XX XX XX XX XX format and IP address in dotted decimal notation of the computer for which you want to reserve an IP address 3 Click the Save button Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry MAC Address Reserved IP Address Status Enabled Figure 5 23 Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify the information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable Disable All button to make all entries enabled disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries Click the Next button to go to the next page and Click the Previous button to return the previous page 5 9 USB Settings USB Settings Media Server User Accounts Figure 5 24 The USB Settings menu There are three submenus under the USB Settings menu shown in Figure 5 24 Storage Sharing Media Server and User Accounts
287. ssful login you can configure and manage the device There are main menus on the left of the web based utility Submenus will be available after you click one of the main menus On the right there are the corresponding explanations and instructions Status Quick Setup Working Mode Network Wireless DHCP USB Settings System Tools Figure 7 1 The detailed explanations for each Web page s key function are listed below 7 2 Status The Status page provides the current status information about the Router on Client Mode All information is read only 164 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN e AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa Firmware Version 3 14 4 Build 130128 Rel 36510n Hardware Version WR710N 1 00000000 Wired MAC Address 00 1D 0F 01 06 28 IP Address 192 168 0 254 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Wireless Working Mode Client Wireless Name of Root AP TP LINK_network Channel 11 Mode 11bgn mixed Channel Width Automatic MAC Address 00 1D 0F 01 06 28 Traffic Statistics Received Sent Bytes 0 444 Packets 0 4 System Up Time 0 days 00 01 54 Figure 7 2 Status Firmware Version The version information of the Router s firmware Hardware Version The version information of the Router s hardware Wired This field displays the current settings or information for the LAN you can configure them in the Network gt LAN page e MAC address The physical address of the Router as seen from the LAN e IP addres
288. st or gateway e Traceroute This diagnostic tool tests the performance of a connection E Note You can use ping traceroute to test both numeric IP address or domain name If pinging tracerouting the IP address is successful but pinging tracerouting the domain name is not you might have a name resolution problem In this case ensure that the domain name you are specifying can be resolved by using Domain Name System DNS queries gt IP Address Domain Name Type the destination IP address e g 202 108 22 5 or Domain name e g http www tp link com Pings Count The number of Ping packets for a Ping connection The default is 4 gt Ping Packet Size The size of Ping packet The default is 64 gt Ping Timeout Set the waiting time for the reply of each Ping packet If there is no reply in the specified time the connection is overtime The default is 800 gt Traceroute Max TTL The max number of hops for a Traceroute connection The default is 20 Click Start to check the connectivity of the Internet 130 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa The Diagnostic Results page displays the result of diagnosis If the result is similar to the following screen the connectivity of the Internet is fine Diagnostic Results Pinging 202 108 22 5 with 64 bytes of data Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 1 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 2 Reply from 202 1
289. start the service for the new settings to take effect If you cannot use the new user name and password to access the shares press Windows logo R to open the Run dialog box and type net use 192 168 0 254 delete yes and press Enter 192 168 0 254 is your router s LAN IP address If the LAN IP of the modem connected with your router is 192 168 1 x the default LAN IP of the router will automatically switch from 192 168 0 254 to 192 168 1 254 to avoid IP conflict in this case please try net use 192 168 1 254 delete yes 157 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o Lio a 6 9 System Tools System Tools Firmware Upgrade Factory Defaults Backup amp Restore Reboot Password System Log Figure 6 30 The System Tools menu Choose menu System Tools and then you can see the submenus under the main menu Diagnostic Firmware Upgrade Factory Defaults Backup 8 Restore Reboot Password and System Log Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below 6 9 1 Diagnostic Choose menu System Tools Diagnostic and then you can transact Ping or Traceroute function to check connectivity of your network in the following screen Diagnostic Tools Diagnostic Parameters Diagnostic Tool Ping Traceroute IP Address Domain Name Ping Count 4 1 50 Ping Packet Size
290. station s MAC address that you want to access gt Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled gt Description A simple description of the wireless station To Add a Wireless MAC Address filtering entry click the Add New button The Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry page will appear shown in Figure 8 20 Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry MAC Address Description Status Enabled Figure 8 20 Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry 208 TL WR710N BBR To eee ig ta TT ood Ck a a Cole C2 mC Ae TL To Mm ao LiLo Ta To add or modify a MAC Address Filtering entry follow these instructions 1 Enter the appropriate MAC Address into the MAC Address field The format of the MAC Address is XX XX XX XX XX XX X is any hexadecimal digit For example 00 0A EB BO 00 0B 2 Give a simple description for the wireless station in the Description field For example Wireless station A 3 Select Enabled or Disabled for this entry on the Status pull down list 4 Click the Save button to save this entry To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify the information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled Click the Disable All button to make all entries disabled Click the Delete
291. storage device 5 If you change the storage settings during the storage connection is established then the changes will not take effect until the router or the client is rebooted 5 9 2 Media Server Choose menu USB Settings Media Server you can create media server that allows you to share stored content with other computers and devices on your home network and on the Internet Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Stopped Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 5 27 Media Server Setting gt Server Name The name of this Media Server gt Server Status Indicates the Media Server s current status started or stopped You can click the Start button to start the Media Server and click the Stop button to stop it gt Name The display name of this folder gt File System The file system type on the partition can be FAT32 or NTFS gt Folder The real full path of the specified folder 125 TL WR710N 150Mbps Wireless N Mini Pocket Router Advanced Edition gt Delete You can delete the share folder by click Delete To set up your media server please follow the instructions below 1 Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router and then the screen will appear as shown in Figure 5 28 Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Stopped Auto scan
292. t Settings Target Description Here displays the description about the target and this description is unique Information The target can be IP address port or domain name Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To add a new entry please follow the steps below 1 2 Click the Add New button In Mode field select IP Address or Domain Name e Ifyou select IP Address the screen shown is Figure 8 62 1 In Target Description field create a unique description for the target e g Target_1 2 In IP Address field enter the IP address of the target 3 Select a common service from Common Service Port drop down list so that the Target Port will be automatically filled If the Common Service Port drop down list doesn t have the service you want specify the Target Port manually 4 In Protocol field select TCP UDP ICMP or ALL e If you select Domain Name the screen shown is Figure 8 63 1 In Target Description field create a unique description for the target e g Target_1 238 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN e E Tale Mm o LL ioa 2 In Domain Name field enter the domain name either the full name or the keywords for example Google in the blank Any domain name with keywords in it e g www google com will be blocked or allowed You can enter 4 domain names 3 Click the Save button Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table Click the Next button to go to the next
293. te The max share folders number is 6 If you want share a new folder when the number has been reached to be 6 you can delete a share folder and then add a new one 8 8 3 User Accounts You can specify the user name and password for Storage Sharing users on this page Storage Sharing users can use Internet Explorer to access files on the USB drive There are two default user accounts that can access the Storage Sharing They are Administrator and Guest as shown in Figure 8 36 Administrator has read write access to Storage Sharing while Guest has read only access to Storage Sharing User Account Management Add New User User Name Password Storage Authority Modify admin admin Read and Write yes Edit guest guest Read Only no Edit Figure 8 36 User Account Management Only Administrator can use a Web browser to transfer the files from a PC to the Writable shared volume on the USB drive To add a new user account please follow the steps below 1 Click Add New User button and the screen will appear as shown in Figure 8 36 2 Self define a User Name 3 Enter the password in the Password field 4 Choose the Storage Authority from the drop down list Read and Write or Read Only 219 TL WR710N MENTE MIE IT TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o LL ioa Add or Modify User Account User Name admin2 Password admin Storage Authority Read and Write v Figure 8 37 Add or Modify User Account gt
294. ter to factory defaults on the following screen Factory Defaults Click the following button to reset all configuration settings to their default values Figure 7 29 Restore Factory Default Click the Restore button to reset all configuration settings to their default values gt The default User Name admin gt The default Password admin gt The default IP Address 192 168 0 254 gt The default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 E Note All changed settings will be lost when defaults are restored 7 9 4 Backup amp Restore Choose menu System Tools Backup amp Restore and then you can save the current configuration of the Router as a backup file and restore the configuration via a backup file as shown in Figure 7 30 184 TL WR710N MENTE MIE LT Ve AY Tale Mm o LL ioa Backup 8 Restore Configuration Backup Backup Configuration Fie Figure 7 30 Backup amp Restore Configuration Click the Backup button to save all configuration settings as a backup file in your local computer To upgrade the Router s configuration follow these instructions e Click the Browse button to locate the update file for the Router or enter the exact path to the Setting file in the text box e Click the Restore button c Note The current configuration will be covered by the uploading configuration file The upgrade process lasts for 20 seconds and the Router will restart automatically Keep
295. ternet connection to remain active at all times enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number of minutes that you wish to have the Internet connecting last unless a new link is requested Caution Sometimes the connection cannot be disconnected although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background Click the Save button to save your settings If your ISP provides PPTP connection please select PPTP Russia PPTP option And you should enter the following parameters Figure 4 15 42 TL WR710N RENTES TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o Lio WAN Connection Type PPTP Russia PPTP v User Name username Password ss Disconnect Disconnected Dynamic IP O Static IP Server IP Address Name IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 DNS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Internet IP Address 0 0 0 0 Internet DNS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MTU Size in bytes 1420 The default is 1420 do not change unless necessary Max Idle Time 15 minutes 0 means remain active at all times Connection Mode Connect on Demand Connect Automatically O Connect Manually Save Figure 4 15 WAN PPTP Russia PPTP User Name Password Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP These fields are case sensitive Dynamic IP Static IP Choose either as you are given by your ISP and enter the ISP
296. the DHCP menu shown in Figure 6 15 DHCP Settings DHCP Client List and Address Reservation Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 6 7 1 DHCP Settings Choose menu DHCP DHCP Settings and then you can configure the DHCP Server on the page as shown in Figure 6 16 The Router is set up by default as a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server which provides the TCP IP configuration for all the PC s that are connected to the Router in the LAN 148 TL WR710N MENTE IE TT Ve AYE Tare Mm o Lio DHCP Server Disable Enable Start IP Address 192 168 0 100 End IP Address 192 168 0 199 Address Lease Time 20 minutes 1 2880 minutes the default value is 120 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 optional Default Domain optional Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 optional Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 optional Figure 6 16 DHCP Settings DHCP Server Enable or Disable the DHCP server If you disable the Server you must have another DHCP server within your network or else you must configure the computer manually Start IP Address Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to start with when assigning IP addresses 192 168 0 100 is the default start address End IP Address Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to end with when assigning IP addresses 192 168 0 199 is the default end address Address Lease Time The Address Lea
297. the Mode to 11bgn mixed and all of 802 11b g n wireless stations can connect to the Router Note If 11bg mixed mode is selected in the Mode field the Channel Width selecting field will turn grey and the value will become 20M which is unable to be changed Channel Width Select any channel width from the pull down list The default setting is Vv automatic which can automatically adjust the channel width for your clients gt Enable Wireless Router Radio The wireless radio of the Router can be enabled or disabled to allow wireless stations access If enabled the wireless stations will be able to access the Router Otherwise wireless stations will not be able to access the Router gt Enable SSID Broadcast If you select the Enable SSID Broadcast checkbox the wireless router will broadcast its name SSID on the air Be sure to click the Save button to save your settings on this page c Note 1 The operating distance or range of your wireless connection varies significantly based on the physical placement of the Router For best results place your Router e Near the center of the area in which your wireless stations will operate e In an elevated location such as a high shelf e Away from the potential sources of interference such as PCs microwaves and cordless phones e Away from large metal surfaces 2 Failure to follow these guidelines can result in significant performance degradation or inability to w
298. the Router Small enough to fit in the average pocket the TL WR710N 150Mbps Wireless N Mini Pocket Router Advanced Edition is uniquely suited to provide robust wireless networking to travelers students or anyone else for work or play Incredible Speed gt TL WR710N supports the newest 802 11n standards and provides backward compatibility with older 802 11b g standards as well The up to 150Mbps wireless speed makes it ideal for handling multiple data streams at the same time which ensures your network stable and smooth Multiple Operation Modes 7 The TL WR710N 150Mbps Wireless N Mini Pocket Router Advanced Edition supports five operation modes Wireless Router mode creates an instant private wireless network and share Internet to multiple Wi Fi devices which is suitable for most hotel and home network Access Point mode creates a wireless network for Wi Fi devices The wireless devices are exposed to the wired network Repeater mode extends your home wireless range by copying the same wireless name and password Client mode works as a wireless adapter for any Ethernet enabled devices such as Smart TV Game Console and PC WISP Client Router mode accesses the Internet wirelessly in areas with no wired ISP infrastructure Reliable Security Protections j With multiple protection measures including SSID broadcast control and wireless LAN 64 128 152 bit WEP encryption WiFi protected Access WPA2 PSK WPA PSK as well as advanced F
299. tility is checked If you want to allow PCs with specific MAC Addresses to access the Setup page of the Router s Web Based Utility locally from inside the network check the radio button Only the PCs listed can browse the built in web pages to perform Administrator tasks and then enter each MAC Address in a separate field The format for the MAC Address is XX XX XX XX XX XX X is any hexadecimal digit Only the PCs with MAC address listed can 72 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TT e AYE Tae Mm o Lio use the password to browse the built in web pages to perform Administrator tasks while all the others will be blocked After click the Add button your PC s MAC Address will be placed in the list above Click the Save button to save your settings E Note If your PC is blocked but you want to access the Router again press and hold the WPS button for more than 5 seconds to reset the Router to factory defaults 4 11 4 Remote Management You can configure the Remote Management function on this page This feature allows you to manage your Router from a remote location via the Internet Remote Management Web Management Port 80 Remote Management IP Address 0 0 0 0 Enter 255 255 255 255 for all Figure 4 53 Remote Management gt Web Management Port Web browser access normally uses the standard HTTP service port 80 This router s default remote management Web port number is 80 For greater security you
300. tion is Target_1 and Domain Name is www google com Click Access Control Schedule in the left to enter the Schedule Settings page Add a new entry with the Schedule Description is Schedule_1 Day is Sat and Sun Start Time is 1800 and Stop Time is 2000 Click Access Control Rule in the left to return to the Access Restriction Rule Management page Select Enable Internet Access Restriction and choose Deny the packets not specified by any access Restriction policy to pass through the Router Click Add New button to add a new rule as follows 78 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN e E Tare Mm o LL ioa e In Rule Name field create a name for the rule Note that this name should be unique for example Rule_1 e In Host field select Host_1 e In Target field select Target_1 e In Schedule field select Schedule_1 e In Action field select Allow e In Status field select Enabled e Click Save to complete the settings Then you will go back to the Access Restriction Rule Management page and see the following list ID Rule Name Host Target Schedule Status Modify 1 Rule_1 Host 1 Target 1 Schedule 1 Edit Delete setup Wizard Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Figure 4 60 Rule Settings 4 13 2 Host Choose menu Access Control Host you can view and set a Host list in the screen as shown in Figure 4 61 The host list is necessary for the Access Restriction Rule Host Setti
301. tion should be chosen according to the security configuration of the AP you want to access It is recommended that the security type is the same as your AP s security type gt Wireless Password If the AP your router is going to connect need password you need to fill the password in this blank Click Survey button on the Wireless page as shown in Figure 3 17 and then AP List page will appear as shown in Figure 3 18 Find the SSID of the Access Point you want to access and click Connect in the corresponding row For example the third item is selected The target network s SSID will be automatically filled into the corresponding box which is shown as the Figure 3 17 22 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve E Ltd To Mm o LL ioa AP List AP Count 16 COCA CO SUTTON GETTING CTI pereira Y ps e pone nes MIT AITANA 4 4c 60 DE 32 63 8 P LINK_18F710 3048 PA2 PSK B 14 E6 E4 E3 87 64 P LINK_TEST 1648 Bo PA2 PSK Back Refresh Figure 3 18 AP List 3 Click the Next button in Figure 3 19 You will then see the Finish page Click the Reboot button to make your wireless configuration take effect and finish the Quick Setup Quick Setup Finish Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish Congratulations This device is now connecting you to the Internet For detail settings please click other menus if necessary Figure 3 19 Quick Setup Finish 3 2 5 WISP Client Router Mode When
302. ton to save all configuration settings as a backup file in your local computer gt To restore the router s configuration follow these instructions e Click the Browse button to select the backup file which you want to restore e Click the Restore button Note The current configuration will be covered with the uploading configuration file The restoration process lasts for 20 seconds and the router will restart automatically Keep the router on during the restoring process to prevent any damage 4 18 6 Reboot This page allows you to reboot the router Click this button to reboot this device Figure 4 95 Reboot the router Click the Reboot button to reboot the router Some settings of the router will take effect only after rebooting which include gt gt Change LAN IP Address System will reboot automatically MAC Clone system will reboot automatically DHCP service function Static address assignment of DHCP server 99 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa gt Web Service Port of the router gt Upgrade the firmware of the router system will reboot automatically gt Restore the router s settings to factory default system will reboot automatically 4 18 7 Password This page allows you to change the factory default user name and password of the router The username and password must not exceed 14 characters in length and must notinclude any spaces Old User N
303. tries in the list to access ID MAC Address Status Description Modify 1 00 0A EB B0 00 0B Enabled wireless station A Modify Delete 2 00 0A EB 00 07 5F Enabled wireless station B Modify Delete 6 6 4 Wireless Advanced Choose menu Wireless Wireless Advanced and then you can configure the advanced settings of your wireless network Wireless Advanced Transmit Power High Beacon Interval Moo 40 1 000 RTS Threshold 2346 256 2346 Fragmentation Threshold 2346 256 2346 DTIM Interval 1 1 265 Enable WWMM Enable Short Gl C Enable AP Isolation Figure 6 13 Wireless Advanced gt Transmit Power Here you can specify the transmit power of Router You can select High Middle or Low which you would like High is the default setting and is recommended gt Beacon Interval Enter a value between 20 1000 milliseconds for Beacon Interval here The beacons are the packets sent by the Router to synchronize a wireless network Beacon Interval value determines the time interval of the beacons The default value is 100 gt RTS Threshold Here you can specify the RTS Request to Send Threshold If the packet is larger than the specified RTS Threshold size the Router will send RTS frames to a particular receiving station and negotiate the sending of a data frame The default value is 2346 146 TL WR710N MENTE MET TN e AY Tale Mm o LL ioa gt Fragmentation
304. twork Static Routing 1D Destination Network Subnet Mask Default Gateway Status Modify Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure 4 73 Static Routing To add static routing entries follow the steps below 1 Click Add New shown in Figure 4 73 you will see the following screen Figure 4 74 Destination Network Subnet Mask Default Gateway Status Enabled w Figure 4 74 Add or Modify a Static Route Entry 2 Enter the following data gt Destination Network The Destination IP Address is the address of the network or host that you want to assign to a static route 85 TL WR710N RENTES TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o Lio gt Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask determines which portion of an IP Address is the network portion and which portion is the host portion gt Default Gateway This is the IP Address of the gateway device that allows for contact between the Router and the network or host 3 Select Enabled or Disabled for this entry on the Status drop down list 4 Click the Save button to make the entry take effect Click the Delete button to delete the entry Click the Enable All button to enable all the entries Click the Disable All button to disable all the entries Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries Click the Previous button to view the information in the previous screen click the Next button to view the inform
305. u can also use the search function to select the BSSID to join gt Survey Click this button you can survey the AP which runs in the current channel gt Security Options This option should be chosen according to the AP s security configuration It is recommended that the security type is the same as your AP s security type gt WEP Index This option should be chosen if the key type is WEP ASCII or WEP HEX It indicates the index of the WEP key gt Auth Type This option should be chosen if the key type is WEP ASCII or WEP HEX It indicates the authorization type of the Root AP gt Password If the AP your Router is going to connect needs password you need to fill the password in this blank Be sure to click the Save button to save your settings on this page E Note 1 The operating distance or range of your wireless connection varies significantly based on the physical placement of the Router For best results place your Router e Near the center of the area in which your wireless stations will operate e In an elevated location such as a high shelf e Away from the potential sources of interference such as PCs microwaves and cordless phones e Away from large metal surfaces 2 Failure to follow these guidelines can result in significant performance degradation or inability to wirelessly connect to the Router 4 7 2 Wireless Security Choose menu Wireless Wireless Security and th
306. unction can take effect gt Connect Manually You can click the Connect Disconnect button to connect disconnect immediately This mode also supports the Max Idle Time function as Connect on Demand mode The Internet connection can be disconnected automatically after a specified inactivity period and re established when you attempt to access the Internet again Click the Connect button to connect immediately Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately Caution Sometimes the connection cannot be terminated although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background If you want to do some advanced configurations please click the Advanced button and the page shown in Figure 4 12 will then appear 38 TL WR710N MENITER MIE TN e E Tale Mm o LL ioa PPPoE Advanced Settings MTU Size in bytes 1480 The default is 1480 do not change unless necessary Service Name AC Name C Use IP Address Specified by ISP ISP Specified IP Address 0 0 0 0 Detect Online Interval 0 Seconds 0 120 seconds the default is 0 0 means not detecting O Use The Following DNS Servers Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 Optional Save Back Figure 4 12 PPPoE Advanced Settings gt MTU Size The default MTU size is 1480 bytes which is usually fine It is not recommended that
307. uter without encryption But it s strongly recommended to choose one of the following modes to enable security WPA PSK WPA2 Personal It s the WPA WPA2 authentication type based on pre shared passphrase e Version you can choose the version of the WPA PSK security on the drop down list The default setting is Automatic which can select WPA PSK Pre shared key of WPA or WPA2 PSK Pre shared key of WPA automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e Encryption When WPA PSK or WPA is set as the Authentication Type you can select either Automatic or TKIP or AES as Encryption amp Note If you check the WPA WPA2 Personal radio button and choose TKIP encryption you will find a notice in red as shown in Figure 5 13 1142 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa WPA WPA2 Personal Recommended Version Automatic Recommended Encryption TKIP vi Wireless Password You can enter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters between 8 and 64 Group Key Update Period 0 Seconds Keep it default if you are not sure minimum is 30 0 means no update We do not recommend using the TKIP encryption if this device operates in 802 11n mode due to the fact that TKIP is not supported by 802 11n specification Figure 5 13 WPA WPA2 Enterprise It s based on Radius Server Version you can choose the version of the WPA security from the pull down list The defau
308. uth Domain MTU Size in bytes 11500 The default is 1500 do not change unless necessary Connection Mode Connect on Demand Max Idle Time 115 minutes 0 means remain active at all times O Connect Automatically O Connect Manually Max Idle Time 115 minutes 0 means remain active at all times Disconnect Disconnected Figure 4 13 WAN BigPond Cable User Name Password Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP These fields are case sensitive Auth Server Enter the authenticating server IP address or host name Auth Domain Type in the domain suffix server name based on your location MTU Size The default MTU size is 1480 bytes which is usually fine It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP Connect on Demand In this mode the Internet connection can be terminated automatically after a specified inactivity period Max Idle Time and be re established when you attempt to access the Internet again If you want your Internet connection keeps active all the time please enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet access disconnects Connect Automatically The connection can be re established automatically when it was down Connect Manually You can click the Connect Disconnect button to connect disconnect immediately This mode also supports the Max Idle Time
309. vity of the Internet The Diagnostic Results page displays the result of diagnosis If the result is similar to the following screen the connectivity of the Internet is fine Diagnostic Results Pinging 202 108 22 5 with 64 bytes of data Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seg 1 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 2 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 3 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 4 Figure 6 32 Diagnostic Results c Note Only one user can use this tool at one time Options Number of Pings Ping Size and Ping Timeout are used for Ping function Option Tracert Hops are used for Tracert function 6 9 2 Firmware Upgrade Choose menu System Tools Firmware Upgrade and then you can update the latest version of firmware for the Router on the following screen 159 TL WR710N MENTE MIE MT TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa Firmware Upgrade Fie Bowes Firmware Version 3 14 4 Build 130128 Rel 36510n Hardware Version WR710N v1 00000000 Upgrade Figure 6 33 Firmware Upgrade gt Firmware Version This displays the current firmware version gt Hardware Version This displays the current hardware version The hardware version of the upgrade file must accord with the Router s current hardware version To upgrade the Router s firmware follow these instructions below 1 4 Download a
310. wireless security function can be enabled or disabled If disabled the wireless stations will be able to connect the Router without encryption But it s strongly recommended to choose one of the following modes to enable security gt WPA PSK WPA2 Personal Its the WPA WPA2 authentication type based on pre shared passphrase e Version you can choose the version of the WPA PSK security on the drop down list The default setting is Automatic which can select WPA PSK Pre shared key of WPA or WPA2 PSK Pre shared key of WPA automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e Encryption When WPA PSK or WPA is set as the Authentication Type you can select either Automatic or TKIP or AES as Encryption c Note If you check the WPA WPA2 Personal radio button and choose TKIP encryption you will find a notice in red as shown in Figure 8 18 206 TL WR710N MENDIETA TN Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa WPA WPA2 Personal Recommended Version Automatic Recommended Encryption TKIP vi Wireless Password You can enter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters between 8 and 64 Group Key Update Period 0 Seconds Keep it default if you are not sure minimum is 30 0 means no update We do not recommend using the TKIP encryption if this device operates in 802 11n mode due to the fact that TKIP is not supported by 802 11n specification Figure 8 18 WPA WPA2 Enterprise It
311. wireless station B with MAC address 00 0A EB 00 07 5F are able to access the Router but all the other wireless stations cannot access the Router you can configure the Wireless MAC Address Filtering list by following these steps 1 Click the Enabled button to enable this function 2 Select the radio button Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the list to access for Filtering Rules 3 Delete all or disable all entries if there are any entries already 4 Click the Add New button pS Enter the MAC address 00 0A EB B0 00 0B 00 0A EB 00 07 5F in the MAC Address field N Enter wireless station A B in the Description field A 0 Click the Save button Select Enabled in the Status pull down list Click the Back button 5 The filtering rules that configured should be similar to the following list 52 TL WR710N MENDIETA LT Ve AYE Tae Mm o LL ioa Filtering Rules Deny the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access ID MAC Address Status Description Modify 1 00 0A EB B0 00 0B Enabled wireless station A Modify Delete 2 00 0A EB 00 07 5F Enabled wireless station B Modify Delete Figure 4 25 Filtering Rules 4 7 4 Wireless Advanced Choose menu Wireless Wireless Advanced and then you can configure the advanced settings of your wireless network Wirel
312. works is 1500 Bytes It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP gt Primary Secondary DNS Optional Enter one or two DNS addresses in dotted decimal notation provided by your ISP Click the Save button to save your settings If your ISP provides a PPPoE connection select PPPoE Russia PPPoE option Then you should enter the following parameters Figure 8 7 WAN Connection Type PPPoE Russia PPPoE i PPPoE Connection User Name username Password s m Confirm Password e Secondary Connection Disabled DynamicIP Static IP For Dual Access Russia PPPoE Wan Connection Mode Connect on Demand Max Idle Time 15 minutes 0 means remain active at all times Connect Automatically Time based Connecting Period of Time from p 0 HH MM to 23 log HH MM Connect Manually Max Idle Time 115 minutes 0 means remain active at all times Disconnect Disconnected Save Advanced Figure 8 7 WAN PPPoE Russia PPPoE gt User Name Password Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP These fields are case sensitive gt Confirm Password Enter again the Password provided by your ISP to ensure the password you entered is correct gt Secondary Connection It s available only for PPPoE Connection If your ISP provides an extra Connection type such as Dynamic Static IP to connect to a loc
313. y Client mode gt WISP Client Router In this mode the device enables multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP 5 6 Network Figure 5 8 the Network menu There is only one submenu under the Network menu shown in Figure 5 8 LAN 5 6 1 LAN Choose menu Network LAN and then you can configure the IP parameters of the LAN on the screen as below 110 TL WR710N MENTE MIE TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa LAN MAC Address 00 1D 0F 01 06 28 Type Smart IP OHCP IP Address 192 168 0 254 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Y IGMP Proxy Enable Note IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol works for IPTY multicast stream The device supports both IGMP proxy with enable or disable option and IGMP snooping Figure 5 9 LAN gt MAC Address The physical address of the LAN ports as seen from the LAN The value can not be changed gt Type Choosing Smart IP DHCP to get IP address from DHCP server or choosing static IP to config IP address manually gt IP Address Enter the IP address of your system in dotted decimal notation factory default 192 168 0 254 gt Subnet Mask An address code that determines the size of the network Normally 255 255 255 0 is used as the subnet mask gt IGMP Proxy The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP feature allows your devices in LAN can watch TV GP Note 1 If you change the IP Address of LAN you must u
314. y and request e Encryption You can select Automatic TKIP or AES e Radius Server IP Enter the IP address of the Radius server Radius Port Enter the port that Radius server used e Radius Password Enter the password for the Radius server e Group Key Update Period Specify the group key update interval in seconds The value should be 30 or above Enter 0 to disable the update WEP It is based on the IEEE 802 11 standard e Type you can choose the type for the WEP security on the pull down list The default setting is Automatic which can select Shared Key or Open System authentication type automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request 204 TL WR710N MENTE TN e AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa e WEP Key Format Hexadecimal and ASCII formats are provided here Hexadecimal format stands for any combination of hexadecimal digits 0 9 a f A F in the specified length ASCII format stands for any combination of keyboard characters in the specified length WEP Key Password Select which of the four keys will be used and enter the matching WEP key that you create Make sure these values are identical on all wireless stations in your network e Key Type You can select the WEP key length 64 bit or 128 bit or 152 bit for encryption Disabled means this WEP key entry is invalid 64 bit You can enter 10 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 5 AS
315. you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP gt Service Name AC Name The service name and AC Access Concentrator name should not be configured unless you are sure it is necessary for your ISP In most cases leaving these fields blank will work gt ISP Specified IP Address If your ISP does not automatically assign IP addresses to the Router during login please click Use IP address specified by ISP check box and enter the IP address provided by your ISP in dotted decimal notation gt Detect Online Interval The Router will detect Access Concentrator online at every interval The default value is 0 You can input the value between 0 and 120 The value 0 means no detect gt Primary DNS Secondary DNS If your ISP does not automatically assign DNS addresses to the Router during login please click Use the following DNS servers check box and enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation of your ISP s primary DNS server If a secondary DNS server address is available enter it as well Click the Save button to save your settings If your ISP provides BigPond Cable connection please select BigPond Cable option Then you should enter the following parameters Figure 4 13 39 TL WR710N Eo AAA KIE TN Ve AYE Tare B o Lite WAN Connection Type BigPond Cable User Name username Password Auth Server sm server A
316. you choose WISP Client Router Mode on Working Mode page in Figure 3 5 take the following steps 1 Click Next and then WAN Connection Type page will appear as shown in Figure 3 20 Quick Setup WAN Connection Type Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt WAN Connection Type gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish The Quick Setup is preparing to set up your connection type of WAN port PPPoE Usually for ADSL Modem and you will need a PPPoE username and password from your ISP Dynamic IP Usually for Cable Modem and the router will automatically obtain an IP address from the DHCP server Static IP This type of connection uses a permanent fixed static IP address that your ISP assigned Next Figure 3 20 Quick Setup WAN Connection Type The Router supports three popular ways PPPoE Dynamic IP and Static IP to connect to the Internet To make sure the connection type your ISP provides please refer to the ISP Make sure the cable is securely plugged into the WAN port before detection 23 TL WR710N MENTE IE TN Ve AYE Tare Mm o Liia gt PPPoE For this connection you will need your account name and password from your ISP If you have applied ADSL to realize Dial up service you should choose this type Under this condition you should fill in both the User Name and Password that the ISP supplied Please note that these fields are case sensitive Quick Setup PPPoE Start gt gt Working Mode gt
317. you want to add or modify an IP MAC Binding entry you can click the Add New button or Modify button and then you will go to the next page This page is used for adding or modifying an IP amp MAC Binding entry IP amp MAC Binding Settings Bind MAC Address IP Address Figure 8 78 IP amp MAC Binding Setting Add amp Modify To add IP amp MAC Binding entries 1 2 3 4 Click the Add New button Enter the MAC Address and IP Address Select the Bind checkbox Click the Save button to save it To modify or delete an existing entry 1 2 Find the desired entry in the table Click Modify or Delete as desired on the Modify column To find an existing entry 1 2 Click the Find button shown in Figure 8 77 Enter the MAC Address or IP Address Enter the Find button in the next page shown in Figure 8 79 Find IP amp MAC Binding Entry MAC Address IP Address ID MAC Address IP Address Bind Link 1 00 04 EB 00 07 BE 192 168 0 173 To page Figure 8 79 Find IP amp MAC Binding Entry 247 TL WR710N MENTE IET TN Ve AYE Tale Mm o LL ioa Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries 8 15 2 ARP List To manage the computer you could observe the computers in the LAN by checking the relationship of MAC address and IP address on the ARP list a
318. your ISP These fields are case sensitive gt Dynamic IP Static IP Choose either as you are given by your ISP Click the Connect button to connect immediately Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately 41 TL WR710N BRO To eee Ct TT ood k a a Cole C2 mC Ae Taree Mm Lo LiLo Ta gt Connect on Demand You can configure the Router to disconnect from your Internet connection after a specified period of inactivity Max Idle Time If your Internet connection has been terminated due to inactivity Connect on Demand enables the Router to automatically re establish your connection as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again If you wish to activate Connect on Demand check the radio button If you want your Internet connection to remain active at all times enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet connection terminates gt Connect Automatically Connect automatically after the Router is disconnected To use this option check the radio button gt Connect Manually You can configure the Router to make it connect or disconnect manually After a specified period of inactivity Max Idle Time the Router will disconnect from your Internet connection and you will not be able to re establish your connection automatically as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again To use this option check the radio button If you want your In
319. ze The normal MTU Maximum Transmission Unit value for most Ethernet networks is 1500 Bytes It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP gt Primary Secondary DNS Optional Enter one or two DNS addresses in dotted decimal notation provided by your ISP Click the Save button to save your settings If your ISP provides a PPPoE connection select PPPoE Russia PPPoE option Then you should enter the following parameters Figure 4 11 WAN Connection Type PPPoE Russia PPPoE i PPPoE Connection User Name username Password s m Confirm Password e Secondary Connection Disabled DynamicIP Static IP For Dual Access Russia PPPoE Wan Connection Mode Connect on Demand Max Idle Time 15 minutes 0 means remain active at all times Connect Automatically Time based Connecting Period of Time from p 0 HH MM to ae 59 HH MM Connect Manually Max Idle Time 115 minutes 0 means remain active at all times Disconnect Disconnected Save Advanced Figure 4 11 WAN PPPoE Russia PPPoE gt User Name Password Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP These fields are case sensitive gt Confirm Password Enter again the Password provided by your ISP to ensure the password you entered is correct gt Secondary Connection It s available only for PPPoE Connection If your ISP pr

TP-Link TL-WR710N User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents